TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Before driving 2 When driving 3 Interior

TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 Before driving 2 When driving 3 Interior

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 Before driving

Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.

Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.

2 When driving

3

Interior features

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other interior features for a comfortable driving experience.

4

Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

5

When trouble arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident.

Detailed vehicle information.

6

Vehicle specifications

7

For U.S. owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners.

Index

Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

1

Before driving

1-1. Key information .............................. 2

Keys ......................................................... 2

1-6. Anti-theft system ......................... 52

Engine immobilizer system......... 52

Alarm.................................................... 54

Theft prevention labels

(U.S.A.)............................................. 56

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk ..................... 4

Smart access system with push-button start ............................. 4

Wireless remote control............... 14

Doors...................................................... 17

Trunk...................................................... 21

1-7. Safety information....................... 57

Correct driving posture ............... 57

SRS airbags ....................................... 59

Front passenger occupant classification system.................... 70

Child restraint systems ................. 76

Installing child restraints............... 79

2

When driving

1-3. Adjustable components ............ 25

Front seats.......................................... 25

Driving position memory system ............................................... 27

Head restraints................................ 30

Seat belts ............................................ 33

Steering wheel.................................. 39

Inside rear view mirror.................. 40

Outside rear view mirrors............ 41

2-1. Driving procedures..................... 90

Driving the vehicle.......................... 90

Starting the engine ......................... 97

Transmission ................................... 100

Turn signal lever............................. 104

Parking brake ................................. 105

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof .......... 43

Power windows................................ 43

Moon roof .......................................... 46

2-2. Instrument cluster ..................... 106

Gauges and meters ..................... 106

Indicators and warning lights .... 110

Multi-information display............. 113

1-5. Refueling........................................ 49

Opening the fuel tank cap........... 49 ii

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers..................... 116

Headlight switch.............................. 116

Fog light switch ................................ 119

Windshield wipers and washer............................................. 120

Headlight cleaner switch ........... 123

Automatic air conditioning system ............................................. 190

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ........................... 198

3-3. Using the audio system............ 199

2-4. Using other driving systems.... 124

Cruise control ................................ 124

Dynamic radar cruise control... 127

Intuitive parking assist ................. 136

Rear view monitor system......... 155

AVS (Adaptive Variable

Suspension System)

(GS430) ....................................... 158

Driving assist systems.................. 159

Audio system type ........................ 199

Using the radio.............................. 202

Using the cassette player ............ 211

Using the CD player.................... 215

Playing MP3 and WMA discs ................................................ 223

Using the DVD player ................ 231

Playing DVD video/audio........ 234

PCS (Pre-Collision System)..... 165

2-5. Driving information................... 168

Cargo and luggage...................... 168

Vehicle load limits........................... 171

Winter driving tips ......................... 172

Setting the touch screen ............ 184

Playing video CD......................... 247

DVD player and DVD video disc information .......................... 251

Optimal use of the audio/ video system................................ 255

Using the steering switches..... 259

3

Trailer towing................................... 177

Dinghy towing ................................ 178

3-4. Using the hands-free system ....................................... 262

Interior features

3-1. Using the touch screen ........... 180

Touch screen .................................. 180

Hands-free system ...................... 262

Using the Bluetooth

® phone ............................................. 267

Setting the hands-free system ........................................... 280

3-5. Using the interior lights.......... 306

Interior lights list........................... 306

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger............. 190

3-6. Using the storage features..... 310

1

2

3

4

5

6

7 iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

List of storage features................ 310

3-7. Other interior features............ 316

Sun visors.......................................... 316

Vanity mirror................................... 317

Clock.................................................. 318

Outside temperature display... 319

Ashtrays .......................................... 320

Cigarette lighter............................ 321

Power outlet................................... 322

Seat heaters.................................... 323

Seat heaters and ventilators .... 325

Armrest ............................................ 327

Rear sunshade.............................. 328

Floor mats....................................... 330

Trunk features................................. 331

Garage door opener.................. 334

Compass.......................................... 339

Lexus Link System ....................... 343

4

Maintenance and care

4-1. Maintenance and care............ 358

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior ......................... 358

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior........................... 360

4-2. Maintenance ............................. 363

Maintenance requirements ..... 363

General maintenance............... 365

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs ..................................... 368

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance.. 369

Do-it-yourself service precautions.................................. 369

Hood.................................................. 372

Positioning the jack ..................... 373

Engine compartment.................. 375

Tires .................................................. 390

Tire inflation pressure................ 400

Wheels.............................................. 404

Air conditioning filter................. 406

Electronic key battery............... 409

Checking and replacing fuses................................................... 411

Headlight aim................................. 429

Light bulbs........................................ 431

5

When trouble arises

5-1. Essential information.............. 438

If your vehicle needs to be towed............................................. 438

If you think something is wrong ............................................. 445

Fuel pump shut off system ........ 446

Event data recorder.................... 447

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency............................... 449 iv

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds................ 449

If a warning message is displayed....................................... 455

If you have a flat tire (Vehicles with run-flat tires) ...................... 472

If you have a flat tire (Vehicles with standard tires)................... 473

If the engine will not start ......... 483

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P.............................. 484

If you lose your keys................... 485

If the electronic key does not operate properly ...................... 486

If the vehicle battery is discharged .................................. 488

If your vehicle overheats ........... 492

If the vehicle becomes stuck ... 495

7

For US owners

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners................................. 530

Index

Alphabetical index................... 532

What to do if............................... 540

1

2

3

4

6

Vehicle specifications

5

6-1. Specifications............................ 498

Maintenance data....................... 498

Fuel information........................... 508

Tire information................................ 511

6-2. Customization .......................... 523

Customizable features .............. 523

6-3. Initialization ................................ 527

Items to initialize ........................... 527

6

7 v

Pictorial index

Exterior

Headlight (low beam)

P. 116

Parking light

P. 116

Hood

P. 372

Windshield wipers

P. 120

Moon roof

P. 46

Outside rear view mirror

P. 41

Side marker light

P. 116

Fog light

P. 119

Turn signal light

P. 104

Headlight (high beam)

P. 116 vi

Fuel filler door

P. 49

Door

P. 17

Tire l

Rotation l

Replacement l

Inflation pressure l

Information

P. 390

P. 473

P. 505

P. 511

Rear window defogger

P. 198

Tail lights

P. 116

Trunk

P. 21

Turn signal light

P. 104

Side marker light

P. 116

: If equipped vii

Pictorial index

Interior

Seat belt

P. 33

Head restraint

P. 30

Power window switch

P. 43

A

Armrest

P. 327

Cup holders

P. 314

Ashtray

P. 320

Power outlet

P. 322 viii

Door pocket

P. 315

Floor mat

P. 330

Driver airbag

P. 59

Knee airbags

P. 59

Front passenger airbag

P. 59

Front seat

P. 25

SRS side airbag

P. 59

Console box

P. 311

A

Inside rear view mirror

P. 40

Lexus link system switches

P. 343

Personal light

P. 306

Moon roof switch

P. 46

Personal light

P. 306

Interior light

P. 306

SRS curtain shield airbag

P. 59

Interior light

P. 306

Vanity mirror

P. 317

Sun visor

P. 316

Garage door opener switches

P. 334

Compass

P. 339 ix

: If equipped

Pictorial index

Interior

B

Driving position memory switches

P. 27

Door lock switch

P. 17

Window lock switch

P. 43

Power window switches

P. 43 x

C

Shift lever

P. 100

Cigarette lighter

P. 321

Ashtray

P. 320

Shift lock override button

P. 484

Cup holders

P. 314 xi

: If equipped

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

Windshield wipers and washer switch

P. 120

Multi-information display

P. 113

Gauges and meters

P. 106

Headlight switch

Turn signal lever

Fog light switch

P. 116

P. 104

P. 119

Seat heater switches

P. 323

Seat heater/ventilator switches

P. 325

Engine switch

P. 97

Parking brake pedal

P. 105

Tilt and telescopic steering control switch

P. 39

Coin holder

P. 313

“AVS” switch

P. 158

Mode select switch

P. 101

“VSC OFF” switch

P. 161

Trunk opener main switch

P. 21

Glove box

P. 311 xii

A

B

“DISP” switch

P. 114

Distance switch

P. 129

Cruise control switch

P. 124, 127

Audio remote control switches

P. 259

Telephone switch

P. 262

Talk switch

*

P. 274 xiii

: If equipped

*

: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

C

Clock

P. 318

Air conditioning system

P. 190

Audio system

P. 199

Outside temperature display

P. 319

Emergency flashers

Navigation system

*

Security indicator

P. 52, 54

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

P. 198 xiv

D

Headlight cleaner switch

P. 123

Rear sunshade switch

P. 328

Intuitive parking assist switch

P. 136

“AFS OFF” switch

P. 117

Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button

P. 107

Instrument panel light control

P. 107

Trunk opener

P. 21

Outside rear view mirror switches

P. 41

Fuel filler door opener

P. 49 xv

: If equipped

*

: Refer to “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

For your information

Main Owner’s Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Lexus

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your

Lexus vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus products. Modification with non-genuine Lexus products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, cruise control system, vehicle dynamics integrated management, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.

xvi

Scrapping of your Lexus

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

xvii

CAUTION n

General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehicle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that will hurt or kill you, your occupants or others.

n

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that distracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

When children are in the vehicle

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key.

When left unattended, children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

xviii

Symbols used throughout this manual

Cautions & Notices

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Lexus and its equipment.

Safety symbol

Throughout this manual, you will also see the symbol of a circle with a slash through it. This means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or

“Do not let this happen”.

xix

xx

2

1-1. Key information

Keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart access system with push-button start

(

→P. 4)

• Operating the wireless remote control function

(

→P. 14)

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

Using the mechanical key

Take out the mechanical key.

After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery depletes or the entry function does not operate properly, you will need the mechanical key.

n

When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant

Turn the trunk opener main switch OFF, lock the glove box and trunk storage extension door as circumstances demand. (

→P. 22, 332)

Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only. n

Key number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the event that a mechanical key is lost, a new key can be made at your Lexus dealer using the key number plate. (

→P. 485)

1-1. Key information

NOTICE n

To prevent key damage l

Do not bend the keys, subject them to storing impact, expose them to high temperatures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.

l

Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any material that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

1

3

4

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart access system with push-button start

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key, for example in your pocket.

Locks and unlocks the doors (

→P. 5)

Unlocks the trunk (

→P. 5)

Starts and stops the engine (

→P. 97)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Locking and unlocking the doors

Press the lock button to lock the door.

1

Unlocking the trunk

Grip the handle to unlock the door.

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

The door cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the door is locked.

Press the button to unlock the trunk.

5

6

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Antenna location

Antennas outside cabin

Antennas inside cabin

Antenna outside trunk

Antenna inside trunk

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk n

Operation signals n

A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

Conditions affecting operation

The smart access system with push-button start uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control from operating properly. (Way of coping;

→P. 486) l

When the electronic key battery is depleted l l

Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise

When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless communication devices l l

When multiple electronic keys has come into contact with, or is covered by a metallic object

When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity l

When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following devices that emit radio waves

• Another vehicle's electronic key

• A wireless key that emits radio waves

• Personal computer l

If window tint with a metallic content or metallic object are attached to the rear window

1

7

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

8 n

Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Turn the engine switch “OFF”.

When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, push and hold , , or for approximately 5 seconds while pushing the button on the key.

The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below. (Wait for at least 5 seconds after each operation to continue an operation.)

Multi-information display

Beep Unlocking doors

Hold the driver’s door handle to unlock only the driver’s door

Hold a passenger’s door handle to unlock all the doors

Hold the door handle to unlock the front and rear doors on your side

Exterior: Beeps 3 times

Interior: Rings once

Exterior: Beeps 4 times

Interior: Rings once

Hold the door handle to unlock the door

Exterior: Beeps once

Interior: Rings once

STEP 3

Hold a door handle to unlock Exterior: Beeps twice all doors Interior: Rings once

Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control and open one of the doors.

If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.

In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (

→P. 54)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk n

Battery-saving function

In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to prevent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging. l

When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more l

When the electronic key has been left within approximately 3 ft. (1 m) of the vehicle for 10 minutes or more l

The system will resume operation when...

The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch l

The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function

(

→P. 14) or the mechanical key (→P. 486) n l l

Electronic key battery depletion

The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used.) If the smart access system with push-button start or the wireless remote control function does not operate, or the detection area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (

→ P. 409)

To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft. (1 m) of the following electrical appliances.

• TVs

• Personal computers

• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones

• Table lamps n

To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not function.)

1

9

10

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk n

Note for the smart access system with push-button start l l

The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.

n l

If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the electronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods n

To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2 m) of the vehicle.

Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the anti-theft system automatically locks the vehicle again.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk n

Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and unforeseeable accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate measures in response to any warning indications on the multi-information display. (

→P. 462)

The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded.

1

Alarm

Exterior alarm sounds once for 2 seconds

Exterior alarm sounds once for 10 seconds

Interior alarm sounds continuously

Situation

Tried to lock the doors using the entry function while the electronic key is still inside the passenger compartment

Tried to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and lock the doors without first turning the engine switch “OFF”

Closed the trunk while the electronic key is still inside and all doors are locked

Tried to lock the vehicle using the entry function while a door is open

Tried to open the door and exit the vehicle without shifting the shift lever to “P”

Correction procedure

Retrieve the electronic key from the passenger compartment and lock the doors again.

Turn the engine switch

“OFF” and lock the doors again.

Retrieve the electronic key from the trunk and close the trunk lid.

Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.

Shift the shift lever to

“P”.

11

12

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Alarm Correction procedure

Interior alarm rings continuously

Situation

Switched to “ACC” mode while the driver's door is open (Opened the driver's door when the engine switch is in “ACC” mode.)

Turned the engine switch

“OFF” while the driver's door is open

Turn the engine switch

“OFF” and close the driver's door.

Close the driver's door. n l

If the smart access system with push-button start does not operate properly

Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.

(

→P. 486) l

Starting the engine:

→P. 487 n

When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

→P. 409 n

Customization n

Settings (e.g. smart access system with push-button start, anti-theft system) can be changed. (

→P. 523)

Certification for the smart access system with push-button start

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

1 n

CAUTION

Caution regarding interference with electronic devices l l

People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep away from the smart access system with push-button start antennas.

The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.

Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves.

Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

13

14

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Wireless remote control

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle and the trunk from outside the vehicle.

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

Opens the windows and moon roof (push and hold)

Unlocks the trunk

(push and hold)

Sounds alarm

(push and hold) (

→P. 55) n

2-step unlocking function

When you push the button, the driver's door is unlocked. Pushing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

n

Operation indicator

Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked. n

Windows and moon roof: A buzzer sounds when the windows and moon roof begin to open.

Door lock buzzer n

If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously if an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

Security feature

→P. 10 n

When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

→P. 12

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk n

Conditions affecting operation

→P. 7 n

Low battery

If the wireless remote control does not function or if it only operates very close to the vehicle, the battery may be low. (

→P. 409) n

Customization n

Settings (e.g. 2-step unlocking function, trunk unlocking function) can be changed.

(

→P. 523)

Certification for wireless remote control

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: NI4TMLF-1

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

l l

NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

l

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

l

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

1

15

16

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. n

Certification for wireless remote control

For vehicles sold in the Canada

NOTE:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control or door lock switch. n

Smart access system with push-button start

→P. 5 n

Wireless remote control

→P. 14 n

Door lock switch

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

1 n

Inside lock button

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles even if the lock buttons are in the lock position.

17

18

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle when the locks are set.

These locks can be set to prevent children from opening the rear doors. Push down rear door switches to lock the rear doors.

Automatic door locking and unlocking systems

The following functions can be set or canceled:

Function

Shift position linked door locking function

Shift position linked door unlocking function

Speed linked door locking function

Driver's door linked door unlocking function

Operation

Shifting the shift lever out of “P” locks all doors.

Shifting the shift lever to “P” unlocks all doors.

All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.

All doors are unlocked when the driver's door is opened within 10 seconds after turning the engine switch “OFF”.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk n

Setting and canceling the functions

To switch between setting and canceling, follow the procedure below:

STEP 1

STEP 2

Close all the doors and switch the engine switch to “IG-ON” mode. (Perform step 2 within 10 seconds.)

Shift the shift lever to “P” or “N”, press and hold the driver's door lock switch (

or

) for 5 seconds then release.

The shift lever and switch positions corresponding to the desired function to be set or canceled are shown as follows.

1

Function

Shift position linked door locking function

Shift lever position Switch position

“P”

Shift position linked door unlocking function

Speed linked door locking function

“N”

Driver's door linked door unlocking function

When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are locked and then unlocked.

19

20

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk n

Closing the front doors from outside with the inside lock button set in the locked position

The door cannot be locked if the engine switch is in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode, or the electronic key is left in the vehicle. (However, depending on the key's location, the system may not be able to detect it. In these instances the door lock protection function will not operate properly.) n

Using the mechanical key

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (

→P. 486) n

Customization

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed. (

→P. 523)

CAUTION n

To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury.

l l l

Always use a seat belt.

Always lock all doors.

Ensure that all doors are properly closed.

l

Do not pull the inside handle of the front door while driving.

l

Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear seat.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the trunk opener, entry function or wireless remote control. n

Smart access system with push-button start

→P. 5 n

Wireless remote control

→P. 14 n

Trunk opener

Open the trunk lid.

1

21

22

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Luggage security system

The trunk opener feature using the trunk opener switch, wireless remote control and smart access system with push-button start can be disabled by turning off a switch inside the glove box. This function allows you to keep valuables safety locked in the trunk when leaving a key with a parking attendant.

Enabled

Disabled

After turning off the trunk opener main switch, lock the glove box using the mechanical key. Take the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only. (

→P. 2)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk n

Trunk lid closer n

When you lower the trunk lid to about half way closed, the automatic trunk closer will close the trunk for you.

Trunk light

When the trunk light switch is set to ON, the trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.

ON

OFF

1 n

Trunk handle

Use the trunk handle when closing the trunk. n

Internal trunk release lever

The trunk lid can be opened by pulling down on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of trunk lid.

The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed.

n

Using the mechanical key

The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (

→P. 486)

23

24

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

CAUTION n

Caution while driving

Keep the trunk lid closed.

This not only keeps personal belongings from being thrown out, but also prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.

n

When children are in the vehicle

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle as they may lock themselves in the vehicle or trunk, which could cause the child to overheat or suffocate resulting in death or serious injury.

n

When the trunk has not been fully closed

Be careful that your fingers do not get caught by the trunk lid when it is closing automatically.

NOTICE n

To avoid damage to the trunk lid closer

Do not apply excessive force when the closer is operating.

1-3. Adjustable components

Front seats

Seat position fore/aft control switch

For driver’s seat only: Height of the head restraint also moves upward or downward with the seat movement.

Seatback angle control switch

Seat cushion (front) angle control switch

Vertical height control switch

Lumbar support control switch

1

25

26

1-3. Adjustable components

CAUTION n

Reclining adjustment n

Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion, to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.

If the seat is too reclined during an accident, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.

When adjusting the front passenger’s seat from the driver’s seat

Wait until a passenger is seated or have gotten off the front passenger’s seat before operating the switch to avoid injuring the passenger.

1-3. Adjustable components

Driving position memory system (if equipped)

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver's seat, steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be entered into the computer's memory and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also possible to set this function to activate automatically when the doors are unlocked.

Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.

The same buttons are found on the front passenger's side, allowing the position of the front passenger's seat to be memorized.

n

Entering a position to memory

Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Switch to “IG-ON” mode.

Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear view mirrors to the desired positions.

While pushing the “SET” button, push button “1”, “2” or “3” until the signal beeps.

If the selected button has already been preset, the previously recorded position will be overwritten.

1

27

28

1-3. Adjustable components n

Recalling the memorized position

Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Switch to “IG-ON” mode.

Push button “1”, “2” or “3” to recall the desired position.

Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation (driver side only)

Memorized driving positions can be recalled when you unlock the driver’s door using the entry function or wireless remote control and open the driver’s door. Steering wheel position is recalled when the engine switch is set to the “IG-ON” mode.

n

Setting the linked door unlock operation

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Set the driving positions into the memory system using the “1”, “2” or “3” buttons on the driver’s side. (

→P. 27)

Turn the engine switch to the “OFF” mode, then close the driver’s door.

Push the “1”, “2” or “3” button on the driver’s side and the button on the wireless remote control at the same time for about 1 second until you hear a beep.

1-3. Adjustable components

STEP 4

Open one of the doors.

If a door is not opened within 60 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.

In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.

(

→P. 54) 1 n

Canceling the linked door unlock operation

STEP 1

Close the driver’s door with the engine switch set to the “OFF” mode.

STEP 2

Push the “SET” button and the or button on the wireless remote control at the same time for about 1 second until you hear 2 beeps.

n

Retained accessory power

Each memorized position (except for the tilt and telescopic steering column) can be activated within 30 seconds after the corresponding side door is opened, even if the engine switch is in the “OFF” mode.

n

If any position memory button is pushed while the adjustments are being made

The operation will stop. To reactivate the system, push the desired button (“1” or “2”) again.

n

If the battery is disconnected

The memorized positions must be reset because the computer's memory is erased when the battery is disconnected.

CAUTION n

Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear passenger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

If this happens, you can stop the movement by pressing another seat position memory button.

29

30

1-3. Adjustable components

Head restraints

n

Vertical adjustment

Driver’s seat

Head restraint height can be adjusted automatically along with the seat position adjustment. (

→P. 25)

Front passenger’s and rear seats

Lock release button

Grip head restraint and move it up or down.

Push and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

Grip head restraint and remove while holding the lock release button.

n

Horizontal adjustment

Front and outboard rear seats

Grip head restraint and twist to tilt forward or backward.

1-3. Adjustable components n

Adjusting the height of the driver’s head restraint manually

Push and hold the lock release button when lowering or raising the head restraint.

1 n

Removing the driver’s seat head restraint n

For removal and installation, ask your Lexus dealer.

Adjusting the height of the head restraints

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears. n

Adjusting the center rear seat head restraint

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when using. n

Head restraints of different seats

The head restraints are specially designed for the seats on which they are installed.

31

32

1-3. Adjustable components

CAUTION n

Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

l

Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

l

Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

1-3. Adjustable components

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driving the vehicle. n

Correct use of the seat belts

Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoulder.

Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

n

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

Do not twist the seat belt.

Fastening the belt

Release button

Push the tab into the buckle until a clicking sound is heard.

Releasing the belt

Press the release button.

1

33

1-3. Adjustable components n

Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)

Up

Down

Move the height adjuster up and down as needed until you hear a click.

Seat belt comfort guide (outboard rear seats)

If the shoulder belt fits close to a person’s neck, slide the seat belt comfort guide forward.

34

Seat belt pretensioners (front and outboard rear seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occupant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal collision.

The pretensioner may not activate in the event of a minor frontal impact, a side impact or a rear impact.

1-3. Adjustable components

Pre-collision seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-collision system) n

When the pre-collision sensor detects an obstacle and determines that a collision is unavoidable, the seat belts lessen collision injury by retracting the slack in the front seat belts before the collision, thus restraining the driver and passenger at an earlier stage.

The seat belts will also operate in the event of sudden braking. (

→P. 165)

Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move around fully.

n

Automatic locking retractor (ALR)

When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (

→P. 80) n

Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (

→P. 33)

Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occupants. Extend the shoulder belt completely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest.

Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a collision.

1

35

36

1-3. Adjustable components n

People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (

→P. 33) n

Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult size. l

Use a child restraint system appropriately for the child, until the child become large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (

→P. 76) n l

When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 33 regarding seat belt usage.

Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated n

The seat belts cannot be used if a pretensioner has activated. After an accident, have your Lexus dealer inspect the pretensioners and replace them, if necessary.

Seat belt extender

If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.

1-3. Adjustable components

CAUTION n

Wearing a seat belt

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking or an accident. Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

l

Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

l

Always wear a seat belt properly.

l

Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt for more than one person at the same time, including children.

l l

Children should be seated in the rear seat and always use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seating position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

n l l

Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

Seat belt damage and wear l l

Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate or buckle to be jammed in the door.

Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose parts.

Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat belts cannot protect an occupant from injury.

l l

Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Lexus dealer.

Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

l

Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of a seat belt.

Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Lexus dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may cause it to activate or operate improperly and may cause death or serious injury.

1

37

38

1-3. Adjustable components

CAUTION n

Using a seat belt extender l

Do not wear the seat belt extender, if you can fasten the seat belt without the extender.

l l

Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system, because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increasing the risk of death or injury in the event of a collision.

The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the one originally intended.

n

Precaution for pre-collision seat belts

Do not rely solely on the pre-collision system to avoid accidents. Always pay attention to the surrounding conditions, and drive safely and responsibly.

NOTICE n

When using a seat belt extender

When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the extender, not on the seat belt.

This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.

1-3. Adjustable components

Steering wheel

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while the engine switch is in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.

Up

Down

Toward the driver

Away from the driver

1

Auto tilt away and auto return

When the engine switch is turned

“OFF”, the steering wheel returns to its stowed position by moving up and away to enable easier driver entry and exit.

Switching to “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode will return the steering wheel to the original position.

CAUTION n

Caution while driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

39

40

1-3. Adjustable components

Inside rear view mirror

In the “AUTO” mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of vehicles behind and automatically reduces the reflected light.

Turns “AUTO” mode on/off

The indicator comes on when

“AUTO” mode is turned ON.

The anti-glare mirror default mode is “AUTO”. The anti-glare mirror is automatically set to

“AUTO” whenever the engine switch is turned ON.

n

To prevent sensor error

To ensure correct functioning of the sensors, do not touch or cover the sensors.

CAUTION n

Caution while driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, or resulting in death or serious injury.

1-3. Adjustable components

Outside rear view mirrors

Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch when the engine switch is in

“ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.

Select the mirror to adjust

(“L”: left or “R”: right)

Adjust the mirror up, down, in, or out using the switch

1

Folding the mirrors

Press the switch

Pressing again will extend the mirrors.

n

When the mirrors are fogged up

Turn on the mirror heaters to defog the mirrors. (

→P. 198) n

Auto anti-glare function

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to “AUTO” mode, the outside rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear view mirror to reduce reflected light. (

→P. 40)

41

42

1-3. Adjustable components n

Linked mirror function when reversing

The outside rear view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is reversing in order to give a better view of the ground. However, this function will not operate when the mirror select switch is in the neutral position (neither “L” nor

“R” selected). n

One touch power adjustment

You can store and recall power adjustments such as the driver's seat, driver's seat belt height, steering wheel and the outside rear view mirrors.(

→P. 27)

CAUTION n

Caution while driving

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in losing control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

l l

Do not adjust the mirrors.

Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.

l

Before driving, be sure to extend mirrors and make an adjustment properly.

n

When the mirror heaters are operating

Do not touch the mirror surface as the mirror surface becomes hot.

And do not touch the mirror surface also when the wiper switch is on at lower than

77

°F (25°C) of the outside temperature.

NOTICE n

If ice should jam the mirror

Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the mirror.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows

The power windows can be opened and closed using the following switches.

Opening

One-touch opening

*

Closing

One-touch closing

*

*

:Pushing the switch in the opposite direction will stop window travel partway.

Lock switch

Press the switch down to lock passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent children from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

1

43

44

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof n

The power windows can be operated when n l

The engine switch is in “IG-ON” mode.

Linked door lock window operation

The power windows can be opened and closed using the mechanical key.

(

→P. 486) n n l

The power windows can be opened using the wireless remote control. (

→P. 14)

Operating the power windows after turning the engine switch “OFF”

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the engine switch is switched to “ACC” mode or turned “OFF”. They cannot, however, be operated once the driver’s or front passenger’s door is opened.

Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly. n

When the battery is disconnected

The power windows must be initialized in order to ensure proper operation.

(Perform for each window with the switch for each seat.)

STEP 1

STEP 2

Open the window halfway.

Fully close the window by pulling the switch up and continue holding the switch for 1 second.

n

The indicator on the switch changes from a flashing pattern to being on when initial settings are complete.

Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (

→P. 525)

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

CAUTION n

When closing the windows

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

l l

Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

Do not allow children to operate the power windows.

Closing a power window on someone can cause death or serious injury.

n

Jam protection function l l

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the window fully closes.

1

45

46

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Moon roof (if equipped)

Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up and down.

n

Opening and closing

Open

Stops just before it is opened fully. Press the switch again to fully open.

Close

To stop partway, press the switch lightly.

n

Tilt up and down

Tilt up

Tilt down

To stop partway, press the switch lightly.

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof n

The moon roof can be operated when n l

The engine switch is in “IG-ON” mode.

Linked door lock moon roof operation

The moon roof can be opened and closed using the mechanical key. (

→P. 486) l

The moon roof can be opened using the wireless remote control. (

→P. 14) n

Operating the moon roof after turning the engine switch “OFF”

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the engine switch is switched to “ACC” mode or turned “OFF”. It cannot, however, be operated once the driver’s door is opened. n

Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

n

If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically

Keep the switch depressed.

n

To reduce moon roof wind noise

Drive with the moon roof opened automatically (just before fully opened position).

n

Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade will open automatically when the moon roof is opened. n

Customization

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed. (

→P. 525)

1

47

48

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

CAUTION n

When opening the moon roof

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

n l l

Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehicle while it is moving.

Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

When closing the moon roof

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

l

Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bodies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being operated. n l l

Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.

Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.

Jam protection function

Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection function intentionally.

l

The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just before the moon roof fully closes.

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap. n

Before refueling the vehicle

Turn the engine switch “OFF” and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.

n

Opening the fuel tank cap

STEP 1

Press the fuel filler door opener switch.

1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.

Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door.

49

50

1-5. Refueling

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap clockwise until you hear a click. The cap will revolve slightly in the opposite direction once released.

n

Fuel types n

Use premium unleaded gasoline. (91 Octane Rating [Research Octane Number

96] or higher)

Fuel tank capacity

Approximately 18.7 gal. (71 L, 15.6 Imp. gal.) n

When the fuel filler door opener switch is inoperable

If the fuel filler door opener switch is inoperable, contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle. If you must refuel your vehicle, you can open the fuel filler door manually as shown. The system to lower internal pressure may not be functioning so you must turn the cap slowly as the pressure releases. In addition, fuel may spill out during refueling. Fill the fuel tank carefully and slowly.

1-5. Refueling

CAUTION n

When refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so, may result in death or serious injury.

l l l

Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static electricity.

Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel vapors to ignite.

Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out the filler neck and cause injury.

Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.

l l

Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

l

Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

n

When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle.

Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

1 n

NOTICE

Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Failing to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.

51

1-6. Anti-theft system

Engine immobilizer system

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The indicator light flashes after the engine switch has been turned “OFF” to indicate that the system is operating.

52 n

System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type of engine immobilizer system.

n l

Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction l

If the grip portion of the key is in contact with a metallic object.

If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system (key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle.

n

Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

1-6. Anti-theft system

CAUTION n

Certifications for the engine immobilizer system

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

1

NOTICE n

For proper system operation

Do not modify, remove or disable the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or modifications are made, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

53

54

1-6. Anti-theft system

Alarm

The system sounds the alarm and flashes the vehicle lights when an attempt to steal the vehicle is detected.

n

Triggering the alarm

The alarm is triggered in the following situations.

l

A locked door or trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry function, wireless remote door lock function or using the mechanical key. (The doors will lock again automatically) l

The hood is opened while the vehicle is locked.

n

Setting the alarm system

Close the doors, trunk and hood, and lock all doors. The system will be set automatically after 30 seconds.

The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.

n

Deactivating or stopping the alarm

Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.

l

Unlock the doors or trunk.

l

Start the engine. (the alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

1-6. Anti-theft system n

Items to check before locking the vehicle l

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following

Nobody is in the vehicle.

l

The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.

n l

No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations.

(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.) l l

A person inside the vehicle opens a door, the trunk or hood.

The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked.

n

Panic mode

When is pushed for longer than about one second, the headlights/tail lights/emergency flashers will flash, the front and rear interior lights will come on, and an alarm will sound for about 60 seconds to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle.

To stop the alarm, push any button on the wireless remote control.

1

55

56

1-6. Anti-theft system

Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)

These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from stolen vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law.

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture

Drive with a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in the seat.

Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (

→P. 25)

1

Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily operable.

Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel downward so the airbag is facing your chest.

(

→P. 39)

Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (

→P. 31)

Wear the seat belt correctly.

(

→P. 33)

57

58

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION n

Caution while driving l

Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

l

Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

l

Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an accident. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

n

Adjusting the seat position l

Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion, to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.

If the seat is too reclined during an accident, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.

l l

Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passengers are not injured by the moving seat.

Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

1-7. Safety information

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

1

Front airbags

Driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front passenger from impact with interior components.

Knee airbag

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.

Side and curtain shield airbags

Front side airbag/rear side airbag (rear side airbags are optional)

Can help protect the torso of the front occupants and rear out- board occupants.

59

60

1-7. Safety information

Curtain shield airbag

Can help protect primarily the head of front occupants and rear outboard occupants.

Airbag system components

Occupant detection system

(ECU and sensors)

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch

Knee airbag

Front passenger airbag

Curtain shield airbag

Front side airbag

Side and curtain shield airbag sensor

Curtain shield airbag sensor

SRS warning light

Rear side airbag (if equipped)

Driver airbag

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

Driver’s seat position sensor

AIRBAG ON and AIRBAG

OFF indicator lights

Airbag sensor assembly

Front airbag sensor

1-7. Safety information

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag system controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front passenger. The driver airbag system consists of the driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front passenger’s airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant classification sensor etc.

In certain types of severe frontal or side impacts, the SRS airbag system triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

n

If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) l l l l

Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying (inflating)

SRS airbag.

A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator) as well as the seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

The windshield may crack.

1

61

62

1-7. Safety information n

Operating conditions (front airbags) l

The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the frontal impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an approximate 15 mph (25 km/h) collision, when the vehicle impacts straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or deform.

l l

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt pretensioners may not activate together.

The SRS front passenger airbags will not activate, if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag may deploy, if heavy luggage is put, even if the seat is unoccupied. (

→P. 70) n

Operating conditions (side and curtain shield airbags) l

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the passenger compartment is subjected to a severe impact from the side.

l

The SRS front side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate, if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy, if heavy luggage is put, even if the seat is unoccupied. (

→P. 70) n

Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other than a collision

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

l l l

Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface

Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

1-7. Safety information n

Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)

The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

l

Collision from the side l l

Collision from the rear

Vehicle rollover

1 n

Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag

(side and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

l l

Collision from the side to the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment

Collision from the side at an angle

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.

l

Collision from the front

Collision from the rear l l

Vehicle rollover

63

64

1-7. Safety information n

When to contact your Lexus dealer

In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting your Lexus dealer.

l

Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

l

The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the

SRS airbags to inflate.

l

A portion of the doors is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

l

The pad section of the steering wheel, front passenger airbag cover or lower portion of the instrument panel is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

l l

The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION n

SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

l l

The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National

Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

1

65

66

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION n

SRS airbag precautions l

If the seat belt extender has been connected to the driver's seat belt buckle but the seat belt extender has not also been fastened to the latch plate of the driver's seat belt, the SRS driver's airbag system will judge that the driver is wearing the seat belt even though the seat belt has not been connected. In this case, the driver's airbag may not activate correctly in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.

l

The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

l

Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint system. Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants and children.

(

→P. 76)

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION n

SRS airbag precautions l

Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

1 l

Do not allow a child to stand in front of the

SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger while the vehicle is moving.

l l

Do not drive the vehicle while the driver or passenger have items resting on their knees.

Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pillars.

l

Do not allow anyone to kneel on the front passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

67

68

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION n

SRS airbag precautions l

Do not attach anything to or lean anything against areas such as the dashboard, steering wheel pad or lower portion of the instrument panel. These items can become projectiles when SRS driver, front passenger and knee airbags deploy.

l

Do not attach anything to areas such as the door, windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail or assist grip.

l

Do not hang coat hangers or other hard objects on the coat hooks. All of these items could become projectiles and seriously injure or kill you, should the SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.

l l

If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.

Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.

l l

Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS airbag components shown on P. 60. Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS airbags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

l

If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation. l

If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front pillar garnish, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Lexus dealer.

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION n

Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Lexus dealer. The SRS airbag may malfunction or deploy

(inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury.

l l

Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel, instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rail l l

Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment

Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kangaroo bar etc.) l l l

Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system

Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD players

Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.

1

69

70

1-7. Safety information

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for front passenger.

SRS warning light

AIRBAG OFF indicator light

AIRBAG ON indicator light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

1-7. Safety information

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system n

Adult

*1

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

AIRBAG ON and AIRBAG OFF indicator lights

SRS warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the right side passenger seats

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner n

Child

*3

or child restraint system

*4

AIRBAG

ON

Off

Flashing

*2

Activated

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

AIRBAG ON and AIRBAG OFF indicator lights

SRS warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the right side passenger seats

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

AIRBAG

OFF

*5

Off

Flashing

*2

Deactivated

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

1

71

72

1-7. Safety information n

Unoccupied

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

AIRBAG ON and AIRBAG OFF indicator lights

SRS warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the right side passenger seats

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

Not illuminated

Off

Deactivated

Activated

Deactivated

1-7. Safety information n

There is a malfunction in the system

Indicator/ warning light

Devices

AIRBAG ON and AIRBAG OFF indicator lights

SRS warning light

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

Front passenger airbag

Side airbag on the right side passenger seats

Curtain shield airbag in the front passenger side

Front passenger knee airbag

Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

AIRBAG

OFF

On

Off

Deactivated

Activated

Deactivated

Activated

*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/ her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

*2: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

*3: When a large child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

*4: Never install a real-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.

(

→P. 86)

*5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for installing the child restraint system properly. (

→P. 79)

1

73

1-7. Safety information

74

CAUTION n

Front passenger occupant classification system precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant classification system.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

l

Wear the seat belt properly.

l

Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.

l

Make sure the AIRBAG OFF indicator lights is not illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the AIRBAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the AIRBAG ON indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt extender while the AIRBAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, the front passenger airbag, side airbag on the front passenger side and front passenger knee airbag may not activate correctly, which could cause death or serious injury in the event of collision.

l l

Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.

Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their legs.

l

Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.

l l

Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the AIRBAG OFF indicator light to be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat. Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the AIRBAG ON indicator light is illuminated, If the AIRBAG OFF indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the AIRBAG OFF indicator still remain illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the fear seat, or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully rearward.

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION n

Front passenger occupant classification system precautions l

When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat in the proper order. (

→P. 79) l l

Do not modify of remove the front seats.

Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction on the detection system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer immediately.

l l

Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the front seatbacks.

Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers the seat cushion surface.

l

Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.

1

75

76

1-7. Safety information

Child restraint systems

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat. l

Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of the child. l

For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (

→P. 79)

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child.

Infant seat

1-7. Safety information

Convertible seat

Booster seat n

When the child restraint system is not in use n

Leave the child restraint system properly secured on the seat. Do not store the restraint loosely on a passenger seat or in the trunk.

Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

Get an appropriate child restraint system for the child. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle's seat belt.

(

→P. 33)

1

77

1-7. Safety information

78

CAUTION n

Child restraint precautions l l

For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.

Lexus strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that conforms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

l l l l

Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if AIRBAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

A forward-facing child restraint system should allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as far back as possible even if AIRBAG OFF indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of collision.

Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body against the door or the area of the seat, front pillar or roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

l

Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

1-7. Safety information

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the outboard rear seats using a seat belt or a child restraint lower anchor belt. Attach the top strap when installing a child restraint.

Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mechanism (ALR/ELR belts except driver’s seat belt) (

→P. 35)

1

Child restraint lower anchorages

Lower anchorages are provided for the outboard rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchorages are attached to the seats.)

Anchor bracket

(for top strap)

Anchor brackets are provided for all rear seats.

79

80

1-7. Safety information

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt) n

Rear facing child seat

⎯ Infant/convertible

STEP 1

Place the child seat on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Run the seat belt through the infant seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and then allow it to retract slightly in order to activate the ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.

1-7. Safety information

STEP 4

While pushing the child seat down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended. n

Forward facing

⎯ Convertible child seat

1

STEP 1

Place the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Run the seat belt through the child seat and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder strap and then allow it to retract slightly into the ALR lock mode.

Lock mode allows the seat belt to retract only.

81

82

1-7. Safety information

STEP 4 n

Booster seat

STEP 1

STEP 2

While pushing the child seat into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child seat is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

Place the child seat on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Sit the child in the child seat. Fit the seat belt to the child seat according to the manufacturer's instructions and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder, and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (

→P. 33)

1-7. Safety information

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

1

Installation with child restraint lower anchorages

Type A

STEP 1

STEP 2

Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the anchorages.

If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto the anchorage.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower anchorage system.

Canada only

83

84

1-7. Safety information

Type B

STEP 1

STEP 2

Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback slightly.

Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.

If the child restraint has a top strap, the top strap should be latched onto the anchorage.

For owners in Canada:

The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower anchorage system.

Canada only

Child restraint systems with a top strap

STEP 1

Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or lower anchors, and lock the head restraint in place at the lowest position.

1-7. Safety information

STEP 2

Open the anchor bracket cover, latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top strap.

Make sure the top strap is securely latched.

1 n

Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages

Anchorages conform to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.

Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifications can be used.

This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

CAUTION n

When installing a booster seat l

Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR lock mode: (

→P. 35)

ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or discomfort to the child.

l

Do not allow the child to play with the seat belt or the child could be killed or serious injured.

85

86

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION n

When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking or an accident.

l

If the driver’s seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right-hand rear seat.

l

Only put a forward facing or booster child seat on the front seat when unavoidable.

When installing a forward facing or booster child restraint on the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if AIRBAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy

(inflate).

l

When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

l l

Ensure the belt and tab are securely locked and that the seat belt is not twisted.

Push and pull the child seat in different directions to be sure it is secure.

l

Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system manufacturer.

1-7. Safety information

CAUTION n

Do not use a seat belt extender

If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a collision.

n

To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchorages

When using the lower anchorages, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchorages and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child seat. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

1

87

88

1-7. Safety information

90

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driving. n

Starting the engine (

→P. 97) n

Driving

STEP 1

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to “D”.

(

→P. 100)

STEP 2

STEP 3

Release the parking brake. (

→P. 105)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently push the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle. n

Stopping

STEP 1

STEP 2

With the shift lever in “D”, push the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to “P”. (

P. 100) n

Parking the vehicle

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

With the shift lever in “D”, push the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to “P”.

Stop the engine.

(

→P. 105)

(

→P. 100)

Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key on your person.

Starting on a steep incline

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to “D”.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

2-1. Driving procedures n

Breaking in your new Lexus l

To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended to observe:

For the first 180 miles (300 km):

Avoid sudden stops.

n l

For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (

→P. 500) n

When starting on an incline

The hill-start assist control may operate. (

→P. 159)

2

91

92

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION n

When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine running.

This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

n

When driving the vehicle l

Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accelerator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

l l l

Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in “R”.

Doing so may cause the engine not to operate or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the trunk is closed.

Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and eventually, death. Have the cause of the problem inspected immediately.

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION n

When driving the vehicle l

Do not under any circumstances shift the shift lever to “P”, “R” or “N” while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can cause significant damage to the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

l

Do not shift the shift lever to “N” while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so may cause the engine brake not to operate properly and lead to an accident.

l l l

Do not turn the engine off while driving.

The power steering and brake actuator (GS430) or brake booster (GS350) will not operate properly if the engine is not running.

Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (

→P. 102)

When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing an accident. l

Be careful when driving on slippery surfaces, as the vehicle may spin or skid when downshifting, rapidly accelerating, braking or turning.

l l

Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious injury.

Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bodies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

2

93

2-1. Driving procedures

94

CAUTION n

When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

n

When the vehicle is stopped l

Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than “P” or “N” the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.

l

Do not leave the vehicle with the engine on for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

l

Always keep a foot on the brake pedal while the engine is running to prevent an accident caused by the vehicle moving.

n l

When the vehicle is parked

Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Failure to do so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the interior of l l the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehicle's electrical components.

Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to “P”, stop the engine and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

l

Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build up, or where snow is expected to fall.

Exhaust gases may enter the vehicle and cause gas poisoning.

2-1. Driving procedures

CAUTION n

When taking a nap in the vehicle n

Always turn the engine off.

Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or press the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire due to abnormal engine overheating.

Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle and cause gas poisoning.

When braking the vehicle l l l

When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid downhill or sharp turns that require making.

In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.

Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the pedal uses up your reserved brake fluid pressure.

l

The brake system consists of 3 individual hydraulic systems: if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance becomes longer.

Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

n

If the vehicle becomes stuck or bogged (4WD models)

Do not spin the wheels recklessly when any of the tires is up in the air, or stuck in sand or mud, etc. This may damage the drive system components or propel the vehicle forward (or in another direction) and cause an accident.

2

95

96

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE n

While driving the vehicle

Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill.

n

When parking the vehicle

Always put the shift lever in “P”. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is accidentally depressed.

n

Avoiding damage to vehicle parts l

Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a long time.

Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

l

When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc. n

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indicators)

Have your Lexus dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as possible.

The rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed. n

Front brake only (GS430): Moderate levels of the brake pad and disc wear allow enhanced front braking power. As a result, the discs may wear more quickly than conventional brake discs. Therefore, when replacing the brake pads, Lexus recommends that you also have the thickness of the discs measured.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or that of the brake discs are exceeded.

If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

l l

It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.

l

The vehicle will behave abnormally.

Replace a flat tire with a new one. (

→P. 476)

2-1. Driving procedures

Starting the engine

Modes can be switched by pressing the engine switch when carrying the electronic key on your person. (The engine can be started in any mode by operating the switch at the same time as depressing the brake pedal.) n

Changing engine switch mode

“OFF” mode

“ACC” mode

Some electrical components such as the audio system can be used.

“IG-ON” mode

All electrical components can be used. n

Starting the engine

STEP 1

STEP 2

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.

STEP 3

Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.

The engine switch indicator turns green.

Press the engine switch.

2

97

98

2-1. Driving procedures n

If the engine does not start n

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (

→P. 52)

When the engine switch indicator flashes in amber

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

n

Auto power OFF function

The engine switch will automatically turn OFF when left in “ACC” mode for 1 hour or more. n

Electronic key battery depletion n

→P. 9

When the electronic key battery is discharged

→P. 409 n

Conditions affecting operation

→P. 7 n n

CAUTION

When starting the engine

Caution while driving

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not press the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not touch the engine switch while driving.

Pressing and holding the engine switch will stop the engine, which may lead to an accident.

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE n

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode for long periods if the engine is not running.

n

When starting the engine l

Do not race the engine.

l

If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine checked immediately.

2

99

100

2-1. Driving procedures

Transmission

Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

n

Shifting the shift lever

While the engine switch is in “IG-ON” mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.

2-1. Driving procedures n

Shift position uses

Shift position

P

R

N

D

S

Function

Parking the vehicle or starting the engine

Reversing

Neutral

Normal driving

*

1

“S” mode driving

*

2

(

→P. 102)

*

1

: To improve fuel consumption and reduce noises, set the shift lever in the

“D” position for normal driving.

*2: By selecting shift ranges using “S” mode, you can control engine braking forces.

n

Selecting a driving mode

The following patterns can be selected to suit current driving and operating conditions.

Power mode

For powerful acceleration and driving in mountainous regions.

Normal mode

Snow mode

For accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces, such as on snow.

Press “SNOW” to return to normal mode.

2

101

102

2-1. Driving procedures

Changing shift ranges in “S” mode

Shift the shift lever to the “S” position and operate the shift lever.

Upshifting

Downshifting

The initial shift range in “S” mode is automatically set to “5” or “4” according to the vehicle's speed. However, the initial shift range may be set to

“3” or “2” if the AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever was in the “D” position. (

P. 103) n

Shift ranges and their functions l

You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.

l

A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than a higher shift range, and the engine revolutions will also increase.

l

If you accelerate while in ranges “1” to “5”, the shift range may automatically range up in accordance with the vehicle's speed.

2-1. Driving procedures n

Downshifting restrictions in “S” mode

The shift lever cannot be downshifted if the following speeds are exceeded. (The warning buzzer will sound twice in this situation.)

Maximum speed mph (km/h)

Downshifting

GS430

120 (194)

GS350

5

→4

124 (200)

4

→3

3

→2

2

→1

88 (142)

59 (95)

24 (38)

87 (141)

56 (91)

28 (45) n

The maximum speeds can get lower when the engine is not warm such as in cold climates or before warm-up.

When driving with the cruise control system (or dynamic radar cruise control system) n

The engine brake will not operate in the “S” mode, even when downshifting to “5” or

“4”. (

→P. 124, 127)

Snow mode automatic deactivation

Snow mode is automatically deactivated if the engine switch is turned to “ACC” or

“IG-ON” mode after driving in snow mode. n

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from “P”

→P. 484 n

If the indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever to “S”

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in “D”.) n

AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the optimal position according to the driver's input and driving conditions.

The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position. (Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)

2

103

104

2-1. Driving procedures

Turn signal lever

Left turn

Right turn

Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change

The left hand signal will flash until you release the lever.

Move and hold the lever partway to signal a lane change

The right hand signal will flash until you release the lever.

n

Turn signals can be operated when

The engine switch is in “IG-ON” mode.

n

If the indicators flash faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned out.

2-1. Driving procedures

Parking brake

U.S.A.

Canada

Sets the parking brake

*

(Depressing the pedal again releases the parking brake.)

*

: Fully depress the parking brake pedal with your left foot while depressing the brake pedal with your right foot.

2

NOTICE n

Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

105

106

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

Tachometer

Displays the number of engine speed in revolutions per minute. (RPM)

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed.

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature.

Multi-information display

→P. 113

Odometer

Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

2-2. Instrument cluster

Odometer/trip meter and trip meter reset button

Changes the display

Resets the trip meter driving range to “0”.

2

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights excluding the clock and outside temperature display, can be adjusted.

Brighter

Darker

Maximum brightness

107

108

2-2. Instrument cluster

Light sensitive optitron meter

To reduce glare or reflection of the instrument cluster, the cluster glass is tinted automatically or manually. You can select a setting from 7 modes.

Display the present setting, then change the mode.

To change the mode, press the button once and then again within 6 seconds.

Each time you press the button, the mode changes in the following order;

1. “AUTO - Norm”

2. “AUTO - Lo”

3. “AUTO - Hi”

4. “MANUAL - 1”

5. “MANUAL - 2”

6. “MANUAL - 3”

7. “MANUAL - 4”

Mode 1 to 3: The cluster glass tint will be adjusted automatically depending on the intensity of sunlight in the surrounding.

Mode 4 to 7: The cluster glass tint will be fixed when a certain level of sunlight is reached in the surrounding.

(“Norm” to “Hi”, “1” to “4” referring to the level of cluster glass tint.)

2-2. Instrument cluster

NOTICE n l

To prevent damage to the engine and its components

Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which indicates the maximum engine speed.

l n

The engine may be overheating if the temperature gauge is in the red zone (“H”). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place. Check the engine after it has cooled completely. (

→P. 492)

To activate the light sensitivity function properly

Do not affix a sticker or window tint to the rear window glass, or put an object behind the rear seat.

2

109

110

2-2. Instrument cluster

Indicators and warning lights

The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and center panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various systems.

Instrument cluster

Center panel

2-2. Instrument cluster n

Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator

(

→P. 104)

Cruise control indicator

(

→P. 124)

Headlight high beam indicator (

→P. 116)

Damping mode indicator

(GS430) (

→P. 158)

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Headlight indicator

(

→P. 116)

Tail light indicator

(

→P. 116)

Fog light indicator

(

→P. 119)

*

“AFS OFF” indicator

(

→P. 117)

(if equipped)

*

Intuitive parking assist indicator (

→P. 137)

Slip indicator (

→P. 160)

Shift position and shift range indicators

(

→P. 102)

“ECT PWR” indicator

(

→P. 101)

“ECT SNOW” indicator

(

→P. 101)

“VSC OFF” indicator

(

→P. 160)

* SRS airbag on-off indicator (

→P. 70)

2

111

112

2-2. Instrument cluster n

Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in the indicated vehicle’s systems. (

→P. 449)

* * * * * * *

*

(U.S.A.)

*

(Canada)

*

(U.S.A.)

*

(Canada)

*

(U.S.A.) (Canada) (if equipped)

*

*

: These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to “IG-ON” mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the lights do not come on, or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION n

If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as ABS and the SRS airbag warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately if this occurs.

2-2. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display

The multi-information display provides information including your vehicle’s driving condition, outside temperature, and warning messages.

l

Trip information (

→P. 114)

Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising related information. l

Intuitive parking assist display (if equipped) (

→P. 138)

Automatically displayed when using intuitive parking assist.

l

Dynamic radar cruise control display (if equipped)

(

→P. 127)

Automatically displayed when using dynamic radar cruise control. l

Warning messages

(

→P. 455)

Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehicle’s systems.

2

113

2-2. Instrument cluster

114

Display items can be switched by pushing the “DISP” switch.

Trip information n

Outside temperature

Displays the outside air temperature.

The temperature range that can be displayed is from

-40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C).

n

Driving range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed. n

Average fuel consumption after refueling

Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled. n

Current fuel consumption

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

2-2. Instrument cluster n

System check display

After switching the engine switch to IG-ON mode, “CHECK” is displayed while system operation is checked. When the system check is complete, “COMPLETED” is displayed before returning to the normal screen.

n

CAUTION

The multi-information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

2

115

116

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

U.S.A.

Canada

The side marker, parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on.

The headlights and all lights listed above turn on.

The headlights and all the lights listed above turn on and off automatically.

(When the engine switch is in “IG-ON” mode.)

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you to turn on the high beams.

Release to turn them off. You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

AFS (Adaptive Front lighting System)

AFS improves visibility at intersections and on curves by automatically adjusting the level of the headlights according to vehicle speed and the degree of the tire angle that are controlled by steering input.

Operates at speeds of 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.

n

Deactivating AFS

Press the switch to turn it OFF.

The indicator turns on when the AFS is deactivated.

2 n

Daytime running light system

To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on automatically (at a reduced intensity) whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.

n

Headlight control sensor

The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or anything that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight control system to malfunction.

117

118

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers n

Automatic light off system

The headlights and tail lights turn off 30 seconds after a door is opened or closed if the engine switch has been switched to “ACC” or turned “OFF” while the headlights are turned on. (The lights turn off immediately if the button on the key is pressed after all doors are locked.)

To turn the lights on again, switch to “IG-ON” mode, or turn the light switch “OFF” once and then back to the or position. n

Automatic headlight leveling system

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users. n

If the indicator flashes...

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. n

Customization

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed. (

→P. 523)

NOTICE n

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary if the engine is not running.

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Fog light switch

The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are on low beam.

OFF

ON

2

119

120

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Windshield wipers and washer

n

Intermittent wiper with interval adjuster (if equipped)

Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when

“INT” is selected).

Intermittent wiper interval adjustment (increase)

Intermittent wiper interval adjustment (decrease)

Intermittent wiper operation

Low speed wiper operation

High speed wiper operation

Temporary operation

Wash/wipe operation n

Rain-sensing windshield wipers (if equipped)

With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle speed.

Sensor sensitivity (low)

Sensor sensitivity (high)

Rain-sensing wiper operation

Low speed wiper operation

High speed wiper operation

Temporary operation

Wash/wipe operation

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers n

The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when n

The engine switch is in “IG-ON” mode.

Dripping prevention wiper sweep

After washing and wiping operation several times, the wipers operate one more time after a short delay to prevent dripping.

n

However, the last sweep will not happen if the vehicle is traveling above 106 mph

(170 km/h).

Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation

Vehicle speed affects the following even when the wipers are not in “AUTO” mode.

l l

Intermittent wiper interval (“INT” mode)

Wiper operation when the washer is being used (delay until drip prevention wiper sweep occurs) n

With “LO” selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to intermittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.

Rain drop sensor (vehicles equipped with the rain-sensing windshield wipers)

The sensor judges the amount of raindrops.

2

121

122

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers n

If no windshield washer fluid sprays n

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

In extremely hot or cold weather n

The system will turn off if the windshield gets extremely hot (at more than 176°F

[80°C]) or cold (at less than 14°F [-10°C]).

Customization

Settings (e.g. drip prevention function) can be changed. (

→P. 526) n

CAUTION

Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or the windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.

NOTICE n

When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

n

When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle n

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled toward you and held continually.

When using an automatic car wash

(vehicles equipped with the rain-sensing windshield wipers)

OFF

Set the wiper switch to “OFF”.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper blades may be damaged.

AUTO

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Headlight cleaner switch

Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.

Press the switch to clean the headlights.

n

The headlight cleaner can be operated when

When the engine switch is in “IG-ON” mode and the headlight switch is turned

ON.

NOTICE n

When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may cause the washer fluid pump to overheat.

2

123

124

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without using the accelerator. n

Set the vehicle speed

Turn the “ON-OFF” button ON.

STEP 1

Push the button once more to deactivate the cruise control.

STEP 2

Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and press the lever down to set the cruise control speed.

n

Adjusting the speed setting

Increase speed

Decrease speed

Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is obtained.

Fine adjustment of the set speed

(approximately 1.0 mph [1.6 km/ h]) can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it.

2-4. Using other driving systems n

Canceling and resuming regular acceleration

Cancel

Push the lever towards you to cancel cruise control.

The setting is also canceled when the brake pedal is depressed.

Resume

To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up.

2 n l

Cruise control can be set when

The shift lever is in the “D” or “4”, “5”, or “6” range of “S”.

n l

Vehicle speed is between approximately 25 mph (40 km/h) and 125 mph

(200 km/h).

Accelerating

The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.

n

Automatic cruise control cancelation

The set speed is automatically canceled in any of the following situations. l

Actual vehicle speed falls more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed l l

Actual vehicle speed is below 25 mph (40 km/h)

VSC is activated n

If the cruise control indicator light flashes

Turn the “ON-OFF” button off once, and then reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

125

126

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION n n

To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.

Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in control of the vehicle being lost and could cause serious or fatal accident.

l

In heavy traffic l

On roads with sharp bends l l

On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

On steep hills l

On winding roads

2-4. Using other driving systems

Dynamic radar cruise control (if equipped)

Dynamic radar cruise control supplements conventional cruise control with a vehicle-to-vehicle distance control. In the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, the vehicle automatically accelerates or decelerates in order to maintain a set following distance from vehicles ahead. n

Select cruise mode

Selecting vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

Turn the “ON-OFF” button

ON.

Push the button once more to deactivate.

2

Selecting conventional constant speed control mode

Turn the “ON-OFF” button

ON.

Switch to constant speed control mode.

(Push and hold for approximately 1 second.)

Push the button once more to deactivate.

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is always reset when the engine switch is switched to

“IG-ON” mode.

127

2-4. Using other driving systems

128 n

Driving in the selected cruise control mode

Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed and press the lever down to set. n

Adjusting the speed setting

Increase speed

Decrease speed

Hold the lever until the desired speed setting is displayed.

In the constant speed control mode, fine adjustment of the set speed (approximately 1.0 mph

[1.6 km/h]) can be made by lightly pressing the lever up or down and releasing it.

n

Canceling and resuming the speed setting

Cancel

Push the lever towards you to cancel cruise control.

The setting is also canceled when depressing the brake pedal.

Resume

To resume cruise control and return to the set speed, push the lever up.

2-4. Using other driving systems n

Changing the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Preceding vehicle mark

Each pull of the switch changes the vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Long

Medium

Short

The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is automatically set to the long mode when the engine switch is set to the “IG-ON” mode.

A vehicle mark is displayed ahead if one is detected.

2

129

130

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruising in vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode

This mode employs a radar sensor to detect the presence of vehicles within 400 ft. (120 m) ahead and to judge the distance between your vehicle and those vehicles.

Note that vehicle-to-vehicle distance will close when traveling on long downhill slopes.

Example of constant speed cruising (when there are no vehicles ahead): When set to 62 mph (100 km/h)

The vehicle travels at the speed set by the driver. The desired vehicle-to-vehicle distance can also be set by operating the vehicle-to-vehicle distance switch.

Example of deceleration cruising (when the vehicle ahead is driving slower than the set speed): When fixed speed cruising is set at 62 mph

(100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)

When a vehicle is detected running ahead of you, in the same lane, the system automatically decelerates your vehicle. When a greater reduction in vehicle speed is necessary, the system applies the brakes. A warning tone warns you when the system cannot decelerate sufficiently to prevent your vehicle from closing on the vehicle ahead.

2-4. Using other driving systems

Example of follow-up cruising (when following a vehicle driving slower than the set speed): When the speed is set to 62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead is driving at 50 mph (80 km/h)

The system continues follow-up cruising while adjusting for changes in the speed of the vehicle ahead in order to maintain the vehicle-to-vehicle distance set by the driver.

Example of acceleration (when there are no longer vehicles driving slower than the set speed in the lane ahead): When the speed is set to

62 mph (100 km/h) and the vehicle ahead driving at 50 mph (80 km/ h) is out of the lane

When the vehicle ahead of you executes a lane change, the system slowly accelerates until the set vehicle speed is reached. The system then returns to fixed speed cruising.

2 n

Dynamic radar cruise control warning lights, messages and buzzers

Warning lights, messages and buzzers are used to indicate a system malfunction or to alert you to the need for caution while driving. (

→P. 458) n

The dynamic radar cruise can be set when l l

The shift lever is in “D” or the “4”, “5” or “6” range of “S”.

Vehicle speed is between approximately 27 mph (43 km/h) and 87 mph (139 km/h). n

Accelerating

The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set speed resumes.

131

132

2-4. Using other driving systems n

Automatically canceling vehicle-to-vehicle distance control

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled in the following situations.

l

Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h) l

VSC is activated l

The windshield wipers are operating at high speed l l

The mode select switch is set to snow mode

The sensor cannot operate correctly because it is covered in some way

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving must be reset by turning the “ON-OFF” button on again.

If vehicle-to-vehicle distance control driving is automatically canceled for any other reason, there may be a malfunction in the system. Contact your Lexus dealer. n

Automatically canceling constant speed control

The set speed is automatically canceled in the following situations. l

Actual vehicle speed is more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below the preset vehicle speed l

Vehicle speed falls below 25 mph (40 km/h) n l

VSC is activated

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance settings

Select a distance from the table below. Note that the distances shown correspond to a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). Vehicle-to-vehicle distance increases/ decreases in accordance with vehicle speed.

Distance options Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

Long

Medium

Short

Approximately 210 ft. (65 m)

Approximately 150 ft. (45 m)

Approximately 100 ft. (30 m)

2-4. Using other driving systems n

Radar sensor and grille cover

Always keep the sensor and grille cover clean to ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control operates properly. (Some obstructions, such as snow, ice or plastic objects, cannot be detected by the obstruction sensor.)

Dynamic radar cruise control is canceled if an obstruction is detected.

Grille cover

Radar sensor

2 n

Certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FCC RF exposure information

This device complies with the FCC RF exposure requirements.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

133

134

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION n

Before using dynamic radar cruise control

Do not overly rely on vehicle-to-vehicle distance control.

Be aware of the set vehicle speed. If automatic deceleration/acceleration is not appropriate, adjust the vehicle speed, as well as the distance between your vehicle and vehicles ahead by applying the brakes, etc.

n

To avoid operating the dynamic radar cruise control by mistake

Keep the “ON-OFF” button off when not in use.

n

Situations unsuitable for dynamic radar cruise control

Do not use dynamic radar cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in inappropriate control of speed and could cause serious or fatal accident.

l

In heavy traffic l l l

On roads with sharp bends

On winding roads

On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow l

Where there are sudden changes between sharp up and down gradients l l

At entrances to expressways

When weather conditions are bad enough that they may prevent the sensors from functioning correctly (fog, snow, sandstorm, etc.) l

Where buzzer can be heard often

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION n

When the radar sensor may not be correctly detecting the vehicle ahead

Apply the brakes as necessary when any of the following types of vehicles are in front of you.

As the sensor may not be able to correctly detect these types of vehicles, the proximity alarm (

→P. 466) will not be activated, and an accident may result.

l

Vehicles that cut in suddenly l

Vehicles traveling at low speeds l

Vehicles that are not moving n l l

Vehicles with small rear ends (trailers with no load on board etc.)

Motorcycles traveling in the same lane

Conditions under which the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control may not function correctly l

Apply the brakes as necessary in the following conditions as the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect vehicles ahead, and an accident may result.

When water or snow thrown up by the surrounding vehicles hinders the functioning of the sensor l l

When your vehicle is pointing upwards (caused by a heavy load in the trunk etc.)

When the road curves or when the lanes are narrow l

When steering wheel operation or your position in the lane is unstable n

To ensure the radar sensor functions correctly

Do not do the following to the sensor or grille cover as doing so may cause the sensor not to function correctly and could result in an accident.

l

Stick or attach anything to them l

Leave them dirty l

Disassemble, subject them to strong shocks l

Modify or paint them l

Replace them with non-genuine parts

2

135

136

2-4. Using other driving systems

Intuitive parking assist (if equipped)

Intuitive parking assist uses sensors in the front and rear of the vehicle to detect the distance between the vehicle and any obstacles, and informs the driver of this distance using the multi-information display, the touch screen, and warning beeps.

The system may be used at speeds less than about 6 mph (10 km/h).

n

Sensor types

Dual sensors

Rear corner sensors

There are 4 sensors installed in the front bumper, two in the center section to detect obstacles directly ahead, and one in each corner of the bumper, to detect obstacles in those areas.

The dual sensors detect obstacles ahead of the vehicle, and judge whether avoidance maneuvers are necessary (whether the obstacle will come within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the vehicle), according to the distance between the obstacle and the vehicle, and the steering wheel position. The screen display and beeps will change accordingly.

These sensors detect obstacles around the rear corners of the vehicle.

Back sensors

These sensors detect obstacles behind the vehicle.

2-4. Using other driving systems n

Intuitive parking assist switch

Press the intuitive parking assist switch to turn the system on/off.

The indicator light will come on when the intuitive parking assist is turned ON.

You can use the system if the engine switch is in the “IG-ON” mode.

If intuitive parking assist is ON, the system will operate under the following conditions;

• The dual sensors will operate if the shift lever is in a position other than “R” or

“P”.

• All corner sensors and the back sensors will operate if the shift lever is in “R”.

2

137

138

2-4. Using other driving systems

Multi-information display and touch screen

If the sensors detect an obstacle, it is displayed on the multi-information display in the instrument cluster.

You can change the conditions under which information is displayed on the touch screen. (

→P. 150)

Multi-information display

Dual sensor detection

Steering guide symbol

Rear corner sensor detection

Back sensor detection

Touch screen

Dual sensor detection

Steering guide symbol

Rear corner sensor detection

Back sensor detection

If the intuitive parking assist is operated while the rear view monitor is showing, the intuitive parking assist will be shown in the upper right corner of the screen.

(

→P. 141)

2-4. Using other driving systems

Display distance and beeps

When the intuitive parking assist is activated, the approximate distance to the obstacle is displayed. Also, if an obstacle with which a collision is possible is detected, a warning beep will sound.

n

Dual sensor detection display and obstacle distance

Touch screen

Approximate distance to obstacle

Multi-information display

With beeps

(danger of collision)

No beeps

(no danger of collision)

3.0 ft. (100 cm) to 1.5 ft. (50 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (continuous)

1.5 ft. (50 cm) to

1.1 ft. (37.5 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (continuous)

1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to

0.8 ft. (25 cm)

(continuous) (continuous) (continuous)

Less than 0.8 ft.

(25 cm)

(blinking) (continuous)

• If the shift lever is in “R”, only the corner sensors will detect obstacles.

2

139

2-4. Using other driving systems

140 n

Rear corner sensor detection display and obstacle distance

Approximate distance to obstacle

Multi-information display

Touch screen

1.5 ft. (50 cm) to 1.1 ft.

(37.5 cm)

(continuous) (continuous)

1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to 0.8 ft.

(25 cm)

(continuous) (continuous)

Less than 0.8 ft. (25 cm)

(blinking) n

Back sensor detection display and obstacle distance

(continuous)

Approximate distance to obstacle

Multi-information display

Touch screen

5.0 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)

(continuous) (continuous)

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.4 ft.

(45 cm)

(continuous) (continuous)

1.4 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 ft.

(35 cm)

(continuous) (continuous)

Less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm)

(blinking) (continuous)

2-4. Using other driving systems

Touch screen (insert display)

Dual sensor (corner) detection

Rear corner sensor detection

Back sensor detection

The tire display and the steering guide symbol will not be displayed.

2 n

Dual sensor detection display and obstacle distance

Approximate distance With beeps No beeps to obstacle (danger of collision) (no danger of collision)

3.0 ft. (100 cm) to 1.5 ft.

(50 cm)

(blinking slowly) (continuous)

1.5 ft. (50 cm) to 1.1 ft.

(37.5 cm)

(blinking) (continuous)

1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to 0.8 ft.

(25 cm)

(blinking rapidly) (continuous)

Less than 0.8 ft. (25 cm)

(continuous)

141

2-4. Using other driving systems

142 n

Rear corner sensor detection display and obstacle distance

Approximate distance to obstacle Touch screen

1.5 ft. (50 cm) to 1.1 ft. (37.5 cm)

(blinking)

1.1 ft. (37.5 cm) to 0.8 ft. (25 cm)

(blinking rapidly)

Less than 0.8 ft. (25 cm)

(continuous) n

Back sensor detection display and obstacle distance

Approximate distance to obstacle Touch screen

5.0 ft. (150 cm) to 2.0 ft. (60 cm)

(blinking slowly)

2.0 ft. (60 cm) to 1.4 ft. (45 cm)

(blinking)

1.4 ft. (45 cm) to 1.1 ft. (35 cm)

(blinking rapidly)

Less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm)

(continuous)

2-4. Using other driving systems

Steering guide symbol

Displays the steering maneuvers required to avoid an obstacle. Move the steering wheel in the direction shown by the arrow.

2

Multi-information display

Touch screen

• The steering guide symbol only shows the maneuvers necessary to avoid an obstacle.

• When using the system, always check your surroundings for safety.

143

144

2-4. Using other driving systems

Beeps and obstacle distance

A beep sounds when an obstacle with which there is a danger of collision is detected. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the interval of the beep becomes shorter.

l

When the following obstacle distances are reached, the beep changes from intermittent to continuous:

• If the distance to the obstacle detected by the dual sensors or rear corner sensors is less than 0.8 ft. (25 cm).

• If the distance to the obstacle detected by the back sensors is less than 1.1 ft. (35 cm).

l

If obstacles are detected by the dual sensors in 2 places at once, or if both rear corner sensors detect obstacles at the same time, the system will sound a warning beep for the closer of the 2 obstacles.

l

If multiple obstacles are detected in front and behind the vehicle at the same time, the warning beep will change in the following manner:

• If an obstacle has been detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the front or rear of the vehicle (a continuous beep is sounding), and a new obstacle is detected near a different area of the vehicle, the warning beep will sound

6 beeps then one continuous beep.

• If an obstacle has been detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the front or rear of the vehicle (a continuous beep is sounding), and a new obstacle is detected within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of a different area of the vehicle, the warning beeps will sound 2 beeps then one continuous beep.

l

You can change the volume of the warning beeps. (

→P. 150)

2-4. Using other driving systems

Obstacle detection range

About 10.0 ft. (300 cm)

About 3.0 ft. (100 cm)

About 5.0 ft. (150 cm)

About 1.5 ft. (50 cm)

The detection area of the sensors is shown to the left.

If obstacles move too close to the sensors, they will not be detected.

If the malfunction screen is displayed, the dual sensor detection range will be shortened from 3.0 ft.

(100 cm) to 1.5 ft. (50 cm).

2

145

146

2-4. Using other driving systems

If there is snow or mud on a sensor

Multi-information display

Touch screen

The same symbol will appear on the insert display.

The location of the affected sensor is displayed. Wipe off whatever is stuck to the sensor. (The above illustration shows something on the left front sensor.)

If the “CLEAN SONAR” message is displayed even though the sensor is not dirty or you have already cleaned it, there is most likely a sensor malfunction. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

2-4. Using other driving systems

If a sensor is malfunctioning

Multi-information display

Touch screen

The same symbol will appear on the insert display.

The location of the malfunctioning sensor is displayed. (The above illustration shows a malfunctioning left front sensor.) Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

2

147

148

2-4. Using other driving systems

If the steering neutral position is unknown

After the battery has been reconnected, the steering sensor will need to be initialized. At this time, if the dual sensors detect an obstacle, the steering guide symbol and both arrows will be displayed.

Multi-information display

Touch screen

Use one of the following methods to initialize the steering sensor.

• With the vehicle stopped, turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, then the right. (The order is not important.)

• Drive for more than 5 minutes on an un-crowded road with as few curves and corners as possible.

If the steering guide symbol disappears, the steering sensor has been initialized. If the steering guide symbol does not disappear, have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

2-4. Using other driving systems

If the steering information is not being correctly received

If the system is unable to receive signals from the steering sensor, or there is a malfunction in the VGRS, the steering guide symbol and both arrows will flash if the dual sensors detect an obstacle.

In this case, have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

2

Multi-information display

Touch screen

If the steering guide symbol is on or flashing, the intuitive parking assist maximum detection range is reduced from 3.0 ft. (100 cm) to 1.5 ft. (50 cm).

The steering sensor malfunction warning display will be aligned with the intuitive parking assist detection display or the intuitive parking assist malfunction warning display.

149

150

2-4. Using other driving systems

Warning beep volume and touch screen settings

You can change the warning beep volume and touch screen operating conditions.

Push to display the “Information” screen. Then touch .

n

Changing the warning beep volume

STEP 1

Touch .

Adjust the beep volume, then touch

STEP 2

.

n

Changing the touch screen operating conditions

STEP 1

STEP 2 l

Touch .

Set one of the following operating condition, then touch

: Displays when the sensors detect an obstacle.

.

l l

: Displays if maneuvers are required to avoid an obstacle (if an obstacle is likely to come within 0.8 ft. [25 cm] of the vehicle).

: Does not display the intuitive parking assist detection screen.

When an obstacle is detected while the rear view monitor is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the top right of the screen even has been selected.

2-4. Using other driving systems n

When the system malfunctions l

If a malfunction occurs and no obstacles have been detected, a warning is displayed, and a malfunction beep sounds for 7 seconds.

If an obstacle has been detected, or another malfunction occurs in a different sensor, the malfunction beeps will not sound.

l

In the following circumstances the displayed warning will disappear:

• If you switch the screen to a different mode.

• If you turn OFF the intuitive parking assist main switch.

• If the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). Once the vehicle speed drops below 6 mph (10 km/h), the warning will be displayed again.

l

If the malfunction screen is displayed, the detection range of the dual sensors is shortened. In this case, the necessity for obstacle evasion (whether the obstacle will come within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the vehicle or not) will not be calculated.

n

When using intuitive parking assist l

The sensors' detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving forward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to control the vehicle’s speed.

• The sensors' detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehicle’s front and rear bumpers.

• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detection distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.

• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display. Even at slow speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come within 0.8 ft. (25 cm) of the vehicle before the display is shown and the warning beep sounds.

• Braking distance may differ according to the road conditions (rain, gravel etc.).

• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or air flow noise of air conditioning system.

• For long obstacles such as walls, the obstacle warning may change as the obstacle gets closer.

2

151

152

2-4. Using other driving systems l

In the following situations, the intuitive parking assist may not function correctly, possibly leading to an accident.

n

• There is ice, snow or mud on the sensors. (Wiping the sensors will resolve this problem.)

• The sensor area is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)

In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show an abnormal display, or obstacles may not be detected.

• The vehicle angle is especially wide.

• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.

• When driving on bumpy, sloped or gravel roads, or over grass.

• If there is something producing ultrasonic waves nearby, such as another vehicle’s horn, motorcycle engine noise, air braking sound from heavy-duty vehicles, or another vehicle using the intuitive parking assist.

• In heavy rain, or if water is splashed on the sensors.

• If a commercial fender pole or radio antenna is installed.

• If towing eyelet is installed on your vehicle.

• If moving towards a high curb or a curb corner.

• Objects such as signs may cause the detection distance to shorten.

• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.

Objects lower than the sensors or thin stakes etc. may be detected initially, but as they draw closer, they may cease to be detected.

• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.

Obstacles that may not be detected correctly

The following obstacles may not be detected.

• Thin objects such as wire, fencing or rope.

• Objects that absorb sound waves, such as cotton or snow.

• Objects with sharp corners.

• Objects where the upper section projects out over the lower section.

• Low objects.

2-4. Using other driving systems n

Certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2

For vehicles sold in Canada

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.

Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-001 du Canada.

CAUTION n

Caution while driving

To reduce the chance of injury in the event of an accident or sudden stop, keep the switch box closed.

n

When using intuitive parking assist

Observe the following precautions.

l

The back sensors and rear corner sensors do not judge whether there is danger of a collision, nor whether the obstacle can be avoided using the steering wheel.

When reversing, always check your surroundings and behind the vehicle for safety.

l

The steering guide symbol (arrow) is an approximate guide regarding obstacles.

It is not driving instructions. When moving forward or reversing, always check your surroundings for safety and drive carefully.

l

Do not install accessories within the sensors' detection areas, as this may cause the intuitive parking assist to function incorrectly, possibly leading to an accident.

153

154

2-4. Using other driving systems

NOTICE n

When using intuitive parking assist

In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a sensor malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

n

• A beep does not sound when you turn the main switch ON.

• The intuitive parking assist operation display flashes, and a beep sound when no obstacle has been detected.

• If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to strong impact.

• If the bumper collides with something.

• If the display shows continuously without a beep.

When changing tires n

If you install tires of a size other than that recommended by the manufacturer, the system will be unable to correctly detect steering wheel movement. Always use tire sizes recommended by the manufacturer.

When washing the vehicle

When washing the vehicle using high pressure cleaning equipment, do not spray water directly on the sensors. Subjecting the sensors to high pressure impact may cause a malfunction.

2-4. Using other driving systems

Rear view monitor system

The rear view monitor system assists the driver by displaying an image of the view behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed in reverse on the screen. This allows the image to appear in the same manner as that of the rear view mirror.

Rear view image is displayed when the shift lever is in “R”.

If you move the lever out of “R”, the screen returns to the previous one.

2 n

Displayed area

Corner of bumper

The area covered by the camera is limited.

Objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.

The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions.

155

156

2-4. Using other driving systems n

Rear view monitor system camera

In the following cases, it may be difficult to see the images on the screen, even when the system is functioning correctly.

• In the dark (e.g. at night).

• If the temperature near the lens is extremely high or low.

• If water droplets get on the camera, or when humidity is high (e.g. when it rains).

• If foreign matter (e.g. snow or mud) get on the camera lens.

• If the sun or headlights are shining directly into the camera lens.

n

Smear effect

If a bright light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by the camera, a smear effect* peculiar to the camera may occur.

*: Smear effect—A phenomenon that occurs when a bright light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle body) is picked up by the camera; when transmitted by the camera, the light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below it.

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION n l

When using the rear view monitor system, observe these precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries.

Never depend solely on the monitor system when reversing.

l

Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear.

l l

Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual distances.

Do not use the system if the trunk is open.

n

Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system l l

If the back of the vehicle is hit, the camera's position and mounting angle may change. Contact your Lexus dealer.

Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.

l l

If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.

The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly distorted when the system is cold.

2

157

158

2-4. Using other driving systems

AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension System) (GS430)

AVS controls the suspension according to the road and driving conditions.

Selecting an optimum driving mode allows good vehicle posture and steering wheel operation in conjunction with VGRS, EPS and active stabilizer suspension system.

Sports mode

For winding mountain road driving or high speed driving.

Normal mode

For normal driving.

2-4. Using other driving systems

Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following systems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle. n

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Restrains the vehicle from slipping when driving on slick road surfaces or in the event of sudden braking.

n

BA (Brake Assist)

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.

n

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces.

n

TRAC (Traction Control)

Maintains drive power and prevents the rear wheels from spinning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

n

Hill-start assist control

Helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an incline or slippery slope. It operates for approximately 5 seconds at maximum. n

VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering) (GS430)

Adjusts the wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle speed and steering wheel movement.

n

EPS (Electric Power Steering)

Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel. n

Active stabilizer suspension system (GS430, if equipped)

Turns at smaller angles to maintain the stable vehicle posture.

2

159

160

2-4. Using other driving systems n

VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics Integrated Management) (GS430)

Provides integrated control of the ABS, VSC, TRAC, hill-start assist control, VGRS and EPS systems.

Maintains vehicle stability when swerving on slippery road surfaces by controlling the brakes, engine output, and the movement of the front wheels. n

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)

→P. 165

When the VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems are operating

If the vehicle is in danger of slipping, rolling backwards when starting on an incline, or if the rear wheels (2WD models) or all wheels (4WD models) spin, the slip indicator light flashes to indicate that the VSC/TRAC/hill-start assist control systems have been engaged.

A buzzer (intermittent) sounds to indicate that VSC is operating.

The stop lights and high mounted stoplight turn on when the hill-start assist control system is operating.

GS430: The slip indicator light flashes as well when ABS is operating.

2-4. Using other driving systems

To disable TRAC and/or VSC

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.

n

Turning off TRAC only

Quickly push and release the button to turn off TRAC.

The slip indicator light should come on.

Push the button again to turn the system back on.

2 n

Turning off both TRAC and VSC

Push and hold the button for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped to turn off TRAC and

VSC.

The slip and VSC OFF indicator light should come on.

Push the button again to turn the system back on.

161

2-4. Using other driving systems

162 n

Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC n

Turning the engine switch OFF after turning off the TRAC and VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.

Automatic TRAC reactivation n

If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when the vehicle speed increases.

Automatic TRAC and VSC reactivation

If only the both TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on even when the vehicle speed increases.

n

Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, BA, VSC, TRAC, hill-start assist control and VGRS systems l l

A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

n

Hill-start assist control is operational when n l l

The shift lever is in the “D” or “S” position.

The brake pedal is not depressed.

VGRS is disabled in the following situations (GS430) l l

During stopping or the steering wheel has been moved for a long time while driving at lower speeds.

After the engine is restarted at less than -22°F (-30°C).

n

Reduced effectiveness of EPS

The effectiveness of EPS is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine OFF. The system should return to normal within

10 minutes.

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION n l

The ABS does not operate effectively when l

The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded.

The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick road.

n

Stopping distance when the ABS is operating on the wet or slick roads l

The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping distance. Always maintain a sufficient distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situations.

When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads l

When driving with tire chains l l

When driving over bumps in the road

When driving over roads with potholes or roads with uneven pavement n

TRAC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slippery road surfaces, even if the TRAC is operating.

Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

2

163

164

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION n l

The hill-start assist control may not operate effectively when l

On steep inclines.

On icy surfaces.

n

When the VSC is activated

The slip indicator light flashes and a warning buzzer sounds. Always drive carefully.

Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes and a buzzer sounds.

n

When TRAC and VSC are off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road conditions. As these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn off TRAC and VSC unless necessary.

n

Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the specified tire pressure level.

n

The ABS and VSC will not function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.

Contact your Lexus dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

Handling of tires and suspension (GS430)

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the

VDIM, and may cause the system to malfunction.

2-4. Using other driving systems

PCS (Pre-Collision System) (if equipped)

Safety systems such as the brakes and seat belts are automatically engaged to lessen impact and injuries to occupants as well as vehicle damage when the radar sensor detects an unavoidable frontal collision. n

Pre-collision seat belts (front seats only)

The seat belts are immediately retracted as the effect of the pretensioner is increased (

→P. 35), to provide even greater constraining force to protect the driver and passengers. In the event of sudden braking or skidding, the system will operate even if no obstacle has been detected. n

Pre-collision brake assist

Applies greater braking force in relation to how strongly the brake pedal is depressed. n

Pre-collision AVS

If the system determines that the collision is unavoidable, the operation of

AVS (

→P. 158) helps prevent the vehicle front from going down when hard brakes are applied.

2

Radar sensor

Detects vehicles or other obstacles on or near the road ahead and determines whether a collision is imminent based on the position, speed, and heading of the obstacles.

Grille cover

Radar sensor n

Obstacles not detected

The sensor cannot detect plastic obstacles such as pylons. There may also be occasions when the sensor cannot detect pedestrians, animals, bicycles, motorcycles, trees, or snowdrifts.

165

2-4. Using other driving systems

166 n

The pre-collision system is operational when l

Seat belt (linked to the radar sensor)

• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).

• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehicle exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).

• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.

l

Seat belts (linked to brake operation)

• Vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h).

• The system detects sudden braking or skidding.

• The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.

• VSC is not turned off.

l

Brake Assist

• Vehicle speed is above 18 mph (30 km/h).

• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehicle exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).

• The brake pedal is depressed.

l

AVS n

• Vehicle speed is above 3 mph (5 km/h).

• The speed at which your vehicle is approaching the obstacle or oncoming vehicle exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h).

Conditions that may trigger the system even if there is no danger of collision l

When there is an object by the roadside at the entrance to a curve l l l

When passing an oncoming vehicle on a curve

When driving over a narrow iron bridge

When there is a metal object on the road surface l

When driving on an uneven road surface l l

When passing an oncoming vehicle on a left-turn

When your vehicle rapidly closes on the vehicle in front

When the system is activated in the situations described above there is also a possibility that the seat belts will retract quickly and the brakes will be applied with a force greater than normal. When the seat belt is locked in the retracted position, stop the vehicle in a safe place, release the seat belt and refasten.

n

When there is a malfunction in the system

Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on or flash. (

→P. 451, 458)

2-4. Using other driving systems

CAUTION n

Handling the radar sensor

Observe the following to ensure the pre-collision system can function effectively.

l l

Keep the sensor and front grille clean at all times.

Clean the sensor and front grille with a soft cloth so you do not mark or damage them.

Do not subject the sensor or surrounding area to a strong impact.

If the sensor moves even slightly off position, the system may malfunction. If the sensor or surrounding area are subject to a strong impact, always have the area inspected and adjusted by a Lexus dealer.

l l

Do not disassemble the sensor.

Do not attach accessories or stickers to the sensor, grille cover or surrounding area.

n

Limitations of the pre-collision system

Do not rely on the pre-collision system. Always drive safely, taking care to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road hazards.

2

167

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions, cargo capacity and load. l

Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure all items are secured in place. l

Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far forward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance. l

For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

168

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) — (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.

For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5

× 150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.

That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

2-5. Driving information

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (

→P. 171)

Example on your vehicle

Cargo capacity

Total load capacity

2

When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 815 lb. (370 kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:

815 lb. — 366 lb. = 449 lb. (370 kg —166 kg = 204 kg)

In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 388 lb.

(176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:

449 lb. — 388 lb. = 61 lb. (204 kg — 176 kg = 28 kg)

As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load equaling the combined weight of the occupants who got on later, by an amount. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

169

170

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION n

Storage precautions l

Do not place anything on the package tray behind the rear seatback.

Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

l

Do not drive with objects on top of the instrument panel.

They may interfere with the driver’s field of view or move during sharp acceleration or turning, thus impairing the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an accident they may injure the vehicle occupants.

n l

Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during an accident or sudden braking.

Weight of the load l

Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control resulting in an accident which may cause death or serious injury.

l l

Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle weight rating.

Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

2-5. Driving information

Vehicle load limits

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. n

Total load capacity: 815 lb. (370 kg)

Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. n

Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)

Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

Even if the number of occupants are within the seating capacity, do not exceed the total load capacity.

n

Towing capacity

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. n

Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants. n

Total load capacity and seating capacity

These details are also described on the tire and loading information label.

(

→P. 400)

CAUTION n

Overloading the vehicle

Do not overload the vehicle.

It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

2

171

172

2-5. Driving information

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropriate to the prevailing weather conditions. n

Pre-winter preparations l

Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside temperatures.

• Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid l

Have a service technician inspect the level and specific gravity of battery electrolyte. l

Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set of tire chains for the rear tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains match the size of the tires.

2-5. Driving information n

Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions. l

Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing. l

To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield. l

Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis. l

Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the brakes. n

When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions. n

When parking the vehicle

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to “P” without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released.

2

173

174

2-5. Driving information

Regulations on the use of snow chains l

Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to location and type of road. Always check local regulations before installing chains. l

Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chains, with the exception of radial cable chains or V-bar type chains.

• Install the chains on the rear tires.

• Refer to the explanation that comes with the tire chains for installation instructions.

l

Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).

Shifting the windshield wiper position

You can shift the wipers to the rest position manually. (In heavy snow or icy condition etc.)

Grip the hook section of the wiper arm firmly when shifting the wiper position.

To rest position

Raise the wiper in line with the windshield.

You can stand the wipers up for the rest position.

*: More than 3.9 in. (10 cm)

2-5. Driving information

To retract position

Lower the wipers by pressing on the upper part of the hook section.

n

Snow chain installation

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.

l

Install and remove tire chains in a safe location. l

Install tire chains on the rear tires.

l

Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying instructions.

CAUTION n

Driving with snow tires l

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury.

Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.

l

Maintain the specified level of tire inflation pressure.

l l

Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of snow tires being used.

Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.

2

175

176

2-5. Driving information

CAUTION n

Driving with snow chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely, and may cause death or serious injury.

l l

Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being used, or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.

Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

l l

Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.

Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle control is maintained.

NOTICE n

Repairing or replacing snow tires n

Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Lexus dealers.

This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

Fitting tire chains

The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly when tire chains are fitted.

2-5. Driving information

Trailer towing

Lexus does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Lexus also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Lexus is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

2

177

178

2-5. Driving information

Dinghy towing

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

NOTICE n

To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

180

3-1. Using the touch screen

Touch screen

By touching the screen with your finger, you can control the audio system and air-conditioning, adjust the screen display etc.

Vehicles with navigation system

Vehicles without navigation system

The “Information” screen shown in the above illustration is displayed when the is pressed.

3-1. Using the touch screen

Adjust Clock

Page Switches

“CLIMATE”

“AUDIO”

“INFO” (Displaying the “Information” screen)

“DISP” (Adjusting the display)

Trip Information. (Displaying the

“Trip Information” screen)

Maintenance

Telephone

Calendar

“LEXUS Park Assist”

Language

Screen Setting

P. 190

P. 199

P. 180

P. 185

P. 182

Navigation System Owner's Manual

P. 267

Navigation System Owner's Manual

P. 150

P. 184

P. 187

P. 318/

Navigation System Owner's Manual

The initial screen

If the engine switch is set to “ACC” or

“IG-ON” mode, the initializing screen will be displayed for a few seconds as the system starts up.

3

181

182

3-1. Using the touch screen

Trip information

Trip information such as driving time, driving distance, average vehicle speed, fuel consumption, etc. can be displayed on the screen. The displayed figure is for general information and may not always reflect precise and actual conditions.

n

Displaying the screen

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

l

Consumption

• After Refueling

Displays the average fuel consumption since the vehicle was last refueled.

• Cruising Range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

l

Cruise

• Average Speed

Displays the average vehicle speed since the engine was started or the function was reset.

3-1. Using the touch screen

• Distance

Displays the total distance since the engine was stared or the function was reset.

n

Resetting the data

Touching will reset the “Average Speed” and “Distance”.

n l

To avoid damaging the touch screen

Touch the screen lightly with your finger. If there is no response, remove your finger from the screen and try again.

n l

Remove any dirt on the screen by wiping with a soft cloth. Do not use detergent.

When using the touch screen l

If the screen is cold, the display may be dark, or the system may seem to be operating slightly slower than normal.

l

The screen may seem dark and hard to see when viewed through sunglasses.

Change your angle of viewing, or remove your sunglasses.

3

183

184

3-1. Using the touch screen

Setting the touch screen

You can change the touch screen to your desired settings.

Language settings

The language used for all voice guidance, messages and touch screen switches may be changed.

Press .

STEP 1

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

Select the desired language.

STEP 4

Touch .

Turning off the beep sound

The beep that sounds when a touch screen button is touched can be turned off.

Press .

STEP 1

STEP 2

Touch .

3-1. Using the touch screen

Adjusting the display

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press .

Adjust the display as desired using / and /

If you do not touch the screen for 20 seconds, the system will return to the previous screen.

Vehicles with CD player

3

Vehicles with DVD player

Color

Tone

Contrast

Brightness

/

Red

Lighter

Weaker

Darker

/

Green

Darker

Stronger

Brighter

185

186

3-1. Using the touch screen n

“Day Mode”

When the headlights are turned on, the screen dims. However the screen can be switched to “Day Mode”.

The screen will stay in “Day Mode” when the headlights are turned on until touched again.

If the instrument panel light control is set to

“MAX”, “Day Mode” is not displayed.

is n

To turn off the picture display

If is touched, the screen display is turned off, and guidance is by voice only.

3-1. Using the touch screen

Screen settings

The following screen settings can be changed.

Automatic transition

20 seconds after air-conditioning or audio system use, the system will return the display to the previous screen.

Switch color

You can select the switch color.

Personal data deletion

The following personal data is deleted:

3

• User selection settings

• Phone book data

• Dialed numbers and received calls

• Speed dial

• Bluetooth

®

phone data

• Security code

• Maintenance conditions*

• Maintenance information “off” setting*

• Memory points*

• Areas to avoid*

• Previous points*

• Route trace*

*: If the navigation system is equipped

187

188

3-1. Using the touch screen n

Setting automatic transition

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

Touch or

STEP 4

Press .

n

Setting the switch color

on the “Screen Setting” screen.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

STEP 3

Touch on the “Information” screen.

on the “Screen Setting” screen.

Touch or

STEP 4

Press .

n

To delete personal data

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

STEP 3

Touch on the “Information” screen.

Touch the on the “Screen Setting” screen.

Touch .

STEP 4

Check carefully beforehand, as data cannot be retrieved once initialized.

3-1. Using the touch screen n

When deleting personal data n

Data can only be deleted when the vehicle is stopped.

When selling the vehicle

Be sure to initialize both the call history and personal data. (

→P. 187) n

If you touch the

The display returns to the previous screen.

3

189

190

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Automatic air conditioning system

Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

Press to display the air conditioning operation screen.

Air conditioning operation screen display button

Driver’s side temperature display

Air conditioning

ON/OFF switch

Airflow display

Dual operation switch

Passenger’s side temperature display

Fan speed display

Driver's side temperature control

Passenger’s side temperature control

Off

Outside air or recirculated mode

Automatic mode

Windshield defogger

Micro dust and pollen removal mode

The above illustration is for a vehicle equipped with the navigation system. The position of may differ slightly for vehicles not equipped with the navigation system.

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Using the automatic mode

STEP 1

Press .

The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature setting.

STEP 2

Press to switch to automatic mode.

Automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.

STEP 3

Press

∧ to increase the temperature and ∨ to decrease the temperature on the .

3

The temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be set separately.

Adjusting the settings n

Adjusting the temperature setting

Press

∧ to increase the temperature and ∨ to decrease the temperature on the .

to separately adjust the Press

∧ (increase) or ∨ (decrease) on the temperature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode). Touch to return the driver and passenger side temperatures to the same setting

(simultaneous mode).

The air conditioning system switches between dual and simultaneous modes each time is touched.

191

192

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger n

Adjusting the fan speed

Touch any switch of operating screen.

Press to turn the fan off.

n

Changing the air outlets

(decrease

↔ increase) on the

Touch any mode on the operating screen.

Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and feet.

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

*: Only in the automatic mode

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger n

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between and button is pressed.

(recycles air inside the vehicle), “AUTO”

(introduces air from outside the vehicle) modes each time the

When the system is switched to automatic mode, the air conditioning system operates automatically.

Defogging the windshield

Press

.

The air conditioning system control operates automatically.

3

Micro dust and pollen filter

Press .

Outside air mode switches to

(recirculated air) mode. Pollen is removed from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.

Usually the system will turn OFF automatically approximately 3 minutes later.

To stop the operation, press again.

193

194

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Adjusting the sensitivity of the air intake control in automatic mode

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press until the smog sensor screen appears while the vehicle is stopped.

Touch any switch of

(lower sensitivity

↔ higher sensitivity) on the operating screen.

Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets

Center outlets

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down

Turn the knob to open or close the vent

Side outlets

Rear seat outlets

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down

Turn the knob to open or close the vent

3

Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down

Turn the knob to open or close the vent

195

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

196 n

Using the automatic mode l

Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature setting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.

The system may switch automatically to recirculated mode when the coolest temperature setting is selected in summer.

l l

Immediately after the switch is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow.

Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is on.

n

Using the system in recirculated air mode n

The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for an extended period.

Window defogger feature n

Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to ations where the windows need to be defogged.

Outside temperature approaches 32

°F (0°C).

The air conditioning system may not operate even when

(outside air) mode in situ-

is touched.

n

When the indicator light on flashes

Touch and turn off the air conditioning system before turning it on once more. There may be a problem in the air conditioning system if the indicator light continues to flash. Turn the air conditioning system off and have it inspected by your

Lexus dealer.

n

Automatic mode for air intake control

In automatic mode, the system detects exhaust gas and other pollutants and automatically switches between outside air and recirculated air modes.

n

When the air conditioning is OFF, and the fan is operating, turning the “AUTO” mode ON will activate the air conditioning system.

l

Micro dust and pollen removal mode

When the outside air is cold, the following may occur.

• Outside air mode does not switch to .

• The air conditioning system operates automatically.

• The operation cancels after 1 minute.

l

In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

CAUTION n

To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE n

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the automatic air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

3

197

198

3-2. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

These features are used to defog the rear window, and to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside rear view mirrors.

Press the button.

Press the button to turn on the rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers. The defoggers will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes. Pressing the button again also turns the defoggers off.

n

Operating conditions

The engine switch must be in the “IG-ON” mode.

CAUTION n

When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

NOTICE n

To prevent battery discharge

Turn the defoggers off when the engine is not running.

3-3. Using the audio system

Audio system type

CD and (optional) DVD player with changer, cassette player, and AM/

FM radio

This illustration below is for a vehicle not equipped with the DVD player.

Vehicles with navigation system

Vehicles without navigation system

The audio system appearance and screen may differ slightly for vehicles equipped with the DVD player.

3

199

3-3. Using the audio system

CD player: Plays audio CDs, CD text, MP3 discs and WMA discs.

DVD player: Plays audio CDs, CD text, video CDs, MP3 discs,

WMA discs, DVD video discs and DVD audio discs.

Title Page

Using the radio

Using the cassette player

Using the CD player

Playing MP3 and WMA discs

Using the DVD player

Playing DVD video/audio

Playing video CD

DVD player and DVD video disc information

Optimal use of the audio/video system

Using the steering wheel switches

P. 202

P. 211

P. 215

P. 223

P. 231

P. 234

P. 247

P. 251

P. 255

P. 259 n

Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is operating.

200

3-3. Using the audio system

CAUTION n l

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. and Canada l

Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:

Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the user’s authority to operate this device.

Laser products

• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.

This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.

• This product utilizes a laser.

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

NOTICE n

To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

n

To avoid damaging the audio/video system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

3

201

3-3. Using the audio system

Using the radio

Press or to choose either an AM or FM band.

When you press trol screen appears.

while listening to the radio, the following audio con-

Display audio control screen

Preset stations

Scan for

receivable stations

(AM mode only)

Power Volume

Adjust the

frequency

(AM, FM mode) or channel (SAT mode)

Preset tuning

Scan for receivable stations

Seek frequency

AM

⋅SAT/FM mode buttons

This illustration is a vehicle not equipped with the DVD player.

202

3-3. Using the audio system

Setting station presets (excluding XM

®

Satellite Radio) dial or pressing

STEP 1

Search for desired stations by turning the

∧ or ∨ on

.

STEP 2

Touch and hold one of the preset stations (1 - 6) until you hear a beep.

Scanning radio stations (excluding XM

®

Satellite Radio) n

Scanning the preset radio stations

AM station

STEP 1

Touch appears.

on the screen or press

Preset stations will be played for a few seconds each.

until “P

⋅SCAN”

or press

STEP 2

When the desired station is reached, touch once again.

FM station

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press until “P

⋅SCAN” appears.

When the desired station is reached, press the button once again.

3

203

3-3. Using the audio system n

Scanning all radio stations within range

AM station

STEP 1

Touch .

on the screen or press

“SCAN” appears on the screen and all stations with reception will be played for a few seconds each.

STEP 2

When the desired station is reached, touch once again.

FM station

or press

STEP 1

Press .

“SCAN” appears on the screen and all stations with reception will be played for a few seconds each.

When the desired station is reached, press the button once again.

STEP 2

RDS (Radio Data System)

This feature allows your radio to receive station identification information and program information (classical, jazz, etc.) from radio stations which broadcast this information.

n

Receiving RDS broadcasts

STEP 1

Touch screen.

or on the

204

3-3. Using the audio system

The type of program changes each time the button is pressed.

l

ROCK l

EASYLIS (Easy listening) l

CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz) l

R & B (Rhythm and Blues) l

INFORM (Information) l

RELIGION l

MISC (Miscellaneous) l

ALARM (Emergency messages)

If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the display.

When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears.

STEP 2

Touch on the screen or press

∧ or ∨ on

.

The radio seeks or scans the station by the relevant program type.

If no radio station of that type is found, “NOTHING” appears on the screen.

n

Displaying radio text messages

Touch on the screen.

If “MSG” appears on the screen, a text message may be displayed.

3

205

3-3. Using the audio system

206 n

Traffic announcement

Touch on the screen.

“TRAF SEEK” appears on the display, and the radio will start seeking any station broadcasting traffic program information.

If no traffic program station is found, “NOTHING” appears on the display.

XM

®

Satellite Radio (if equipped) n

Receiving XM

®

Satellite Radio

STEP 1

Press until “SAT” appears on the screen.

The display changes as follows each time the switch is pressed.

AM

→ SAT1 → SAT2 → SAT3

STEP 2

Turn the dial to select a desired channel from all the categories or press

∧ or ∨ on

to select a desired channel in the current category.

n

Presetting XM

®

Satellite Radio channels

Select the desired channel. Touch one of the preset stations (1 - 6) and hold it until you hear a beep.

n

Changing the channel category

Touch or on the screen.

3-3. Using the audio system n

Scanning XM

®

Satellite Radio channels l

Scanning channels in the current category

STEP 1

.

Touch on the screen or press

“SCAN” appears on the screen.

or press

STEP 2

When the desired channel is reached, touch the button once again.

l

Scanning preset channels

on the screen or press

STEP 1

Touch you hear a beep.

and hold it until

STEP 2

“P

⋅SCAN” appears on the screen.

When the desired channel is reached, touch the button once again.

or press n

Displaying the title and artist name

Touch on the screen.

The screen will display up to 10 characters.

Touch the button once again to return to the previous screen.

3

207

3-3. Using the audio system n

When the battery is disconnected n

All preset stations are erased.

Reception sensitivity l l

Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the continually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.

n

Receiving XM

®

Satellite Radio

The optional Lexus genuine satellite radio tuner and antenna allows you to receive and play XM

®

Satellite Radio broadcasts. (Subscription is required. Available only in the 48 contiguous United States.)

* l

XM

®

subscriptions

For detailed information about XM

®

Satellite Radio or to subscribe, visit XM

® on the web at www.xmradio.com or call 1-877-515-3987.

l

Radio ID

You will need the radio ID when activating XM

®

service or reporting a prob-

dial, and the receiver's 8-character ID lem. Select “CH000” using the number will appear.

l

Satellite tuner

The tuner supports only Audio Services (Music and Talk) and the accompanying Text Information of XM

®

Satellite Radio.

*

: Terms and services provided by XM

®

Satellite Radio are subject to change without notice.

208

3-3. Using the audio system n

If the satellite radio does not operate normally

If a problem occurs with the XM

®

tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Refer to the table below to identify the problem, and take the suggested corrective action.

The XM

® the XM

®

antenna is not connected. Check whether

antenna cable is attached securely.

ANTENNA

There is a short-circuit in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer.

You have not subscribed to XM

®

Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.

Contact XM

®

Satellite Radio for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can choose

“CH000” and all free-to-air channels.

UPDATING

NO SIGNAL

LOADING

The premium channel you selected is not authorized.

Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact XM

®

Satellite

Radio.

The XM

®

signal is too weak at the current location.

Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

The unit is acquiring audio or program information.

Wait until the unit has received the information.

OFF AIR

-----

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed.

3

209

210

3-3. Using the audio system

The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previ-

--ous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

Contact the XM

®

Listener Care Center at 1-877-515-3987 during the following hours

*

.

Monday - Saturday: 6 a.m. - 2 a.m. Eastern Time

Sunday: 8 a.m. - 8 p.m. Eastern Time

*

: Subject to change without notice.

n

Certifications for the radio tuner

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.

l

If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of the following:

Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.

l

Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.

l l

Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

3-3. Using the audio system

Using the cassette player

Insert a cassette tape or press with a tape inserted.

When you press trol screen appears.

while listening to the tape, the following audio con-

Display audio control screen

Rewind Fast forward

3

Change playback direction

Repeat play

Skip play

Noise reduction

Power Volume

Playback

Change playback direction

Track selection

Tape eject Tape slot

This illustration is a vehicle not equipped with the DVD player.

211

212

3-3. Using the audio system

Selecting a track n

Skip a number of tracks at a time.

STEP 1

Press

∧ on

.

STEP 2

Press

∧ until the number you want to skip appears.

9 tracks can be skipped at a time.

n

Rewind a number of tracks at a time.

STEP 1

Press

∨ on

.

STEP 2

Press

∨ until the number you want to rewind appears.

9 tracks can be rewound at a time.

Note that the number includes the current track.

3-3. Using the audio system

Using Dolby

®

Noise Reduction

Touch on the screen.

Reduces the level of noise for tapes recorded with Dolby NR only.

Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. DOLBY and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

n

Canceling noise reduction, skip play, repeat play, rewind and fast forward

To cancel ,

To cancel and

and : Touch the corresponding button on the screen.

: Touch the corresponding button on the screen or press

.

n

Auto-reverse feature

After the cassette player reaches the end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or fast forwarding.

n

When the cassette player does not operate correctly due to the cassette recording conditions

Forwarding to the beginning of a track, repeat, blank tape skip and fast-forward may not be possible in the following situations: l l

The interval between tracks is less than 3 seconds (beginning of track and repeat playback) or less than 15 seconds (blank tape skip).

When there is noise between 2 tracks.

l

The beginning and end of subsequent tracks are not clearly defined.

n

Cleaning the cassette player

Cassette player components (heads, capstan, pinch rollers) should be cleaned at least once a month using a cleaning tape to remove dirt and dust that can easily build up.

n

Using long playing cassette tapes

Avoid using tapes with a length of more than 90 minutes, as the tape used is very thin and may become tangled in the cassette player.

3

213

214

3-3. Using the audio system

NOTICE n

Cassette tapes that cannot be used

Do not use a cassette tape if it has been damaged or tangled or if its label is peeling off. Such tapes may affect playing speed and may also get stuck in the player.

n

Cassette player precautions l l l

Store cassette tapes away from direct sunlight.

Do not insert anything other than cassette tapes into the cassette player.

Do not apply oil to the cassette player.

3-3. Using the audio system

Using the CD player

Insert a CD or press

When you press screen appears.

with a CD inserted.

while listening to a CD, the following audio control

Display audio control screen

Display track list

Repeat play

Select CD

Search playback

Random playback

Power Volume

CD slot

Track selection

CD eject CD load

Playback

This illustration is a vehicle equipped with the DVD player.

Select CD

3

215

216

3-3. Using the audio system

Loading a CD n

Loading a single CD

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press .

When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert a CD after the CD/DVD player door opens.

n

Loading multiple CDs

until you hear a beep.

STEP 1

Press and hold

STEP 2

STEP 3

When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert a CD after the CD/DVD player door opens.

After inserting a CD, wait until the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, then insert the next CD after the CD/DVD door has opened.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have inserted all CDs.

To cancel the operation, press the or button. If you do not insert a CD within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.

Ejecting CDs n

Ejecting a CD

STEP 1

To select the CD to be ejected, touch the desired disc number (1 -

6) on the screen or press

∧ or ∨ on

.

STEP 2

Press n

Ejecting all CDs

and remove the CD.

Press and hold until you hear a beep, then remove the CDs.

3-3. Using the audio system

Selecting, fast forwarding and scanning tracks n

Selecting a track

Press

∧ to move up and ∨ to move down using track number appears on the screen.

To fast forward or rewind, press and hold

∧ or ∨ on

.

until the desired n

Selecting a track from the track list

STEP 1

Touch on the screen.

Touch the desired track number.

STEP 2

or : changes the list by 6 track groups.

This function is available only when the vehicle is not moving.

3 n

Scanning a CD

STEP 1

Touch on the screen.

“SCAN” appears on the screen.

The first 10 seconds of each track will be played.

Touch once again when the desired track is reached.

STEP 2

217

218

3-3. Using the audio system

Selecting a CD n

To select a CD to play

Touch the desired disc number (1 - 6) on the screen or press

∧ or ∨ on

.

n

To scan loaded CDs

STEP 1

Touch and hold on the screen until “D

⋅SCAN” appears.

The first 10 seconds of the first track on each CD will be played.

Touch once again when the desired CD is reached.

STEP 2

Random playback n

Current CD

Touch on the screen.

Songs are played in random order until random playback is canceled.

n

All CDs

Touch and hold on the screen until “D

⋅RAND” appears.

Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order until the button is touched once again.

Repeating a track or a disc n

Repeating a track

Touch on the screen.

n

Repeating a disc

Touch on the screen and hold until “D

⋅RPT” appears.

3-3. Using the audio system n

Canceling random, repeat and scan playback n

Touch , , or on the screen once again.

Displaying the title and artist name

If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to

16 letters can be displayed.

n

Error messages

Refer to the following table and take the appropriate measures. If the problem is not rectified, take the vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

Message

No CD or

No Disc

CD X Check or

DISC X Check

CD Error or

DVD Error

NO MUSIC FILE

Cause

There is no disc in the CD or DVD changer

• The disc X is dirty or damaged

• The disc X is inserted upside down

• The disc X is not playable with the player

• There is a malfunction within the system

• Operation is stopped due to a high temperature inside the player

This indicates that no playable data is included in the disc

Correction

Procedures

Insert a disc

• Clean the disc

• Insert the disc correctly

• Confirm the disc is playable with the player

• Eject the disc

• Eject the disc and allow the player to cool down

Eject the disc

3

219

3-3. Using the audio system n

CD compatibility

Audio CDs

Only audio CDs with the marks shown to the left can be used.

The following products may not be playable on your CD player.

l

SACDs l l dts-CDs

Copy-protected CDs n

CD player protection feature n

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected.

If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods n

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

220

3-3. Using the audio system

NOTICE n

Discs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of discs, 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters or dual discs.

Doing so may damage the player and render the disc insert/eject function unusable.

l

Discs that have a diameter that is not 4.7 in.

(12 cm).

l

Low-quality and deformed discs.

l

Discs with a transparent or translucent recording area.

l

Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R labels attached to them, or that have the label peeled off.

3

221

3-3. Using the audio system

NOTICE n

Player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the player itself.

l

Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot.

l l l

Do not apply oil to the player.

Store discs away from direct sunlight.

Never try to disassemble any part of the player.

l

Do not insert more than one disc at a time.

222

3-3. Using the audio system

Playing MP3 and WMA discs

with a disc inserted. Insert an MP3 or WMA disc or press

When you press trol screen appears.

during playback of the disc, the following audio con-

Display audio control screen

Display folder list

Repeat play

Select folder

Search playback

Random playback

Power Volume

CD slot

Select file

Select CD

Select file

CD eject

CD load

Playback

This illustration is a vehicle equipped with the DVD player.

3

223

3-3. Using the audio system

Loading, ejecting and selecting MP3 and WMA discs

Refer to the section entitled “Using the CD player” for details. (

→P. 215)

Selecting a folder n

Selecting a folder

Touch “FOLDER ous/next folder.

” or “ ” on the screen to select the previn

Selecting a folder from the folder list

STEP 1

Touch on the screen.

Touch the desired folder number.

STEP 2

or :changes the list by 6 folder groups.

: displays the details of the file currently playing.

: displays the file list.

This function is available only when the vehicle is not moving.

n

Selecting the desired folder by cueing the first file of each folder

Touch and hold on the screen until “FLD

⋅SCAN” appears. When the desired folder is reached, touch once again.

224

3-3. Using the audio system

Selecting and scanning files n

Selecting one file at a time

dial or press

∧ or ∨ on

Turn the to select the desired file.

n

Selecting a file from the file list

Touch on the screen to turn the folder list on.

STEP 1

on the folder list

STEP 2

Touch screen.

3

STEP 3

Touch the desired file number.

or : changes the list by 6 groups.

: displays the folder list.

: displays the details of the file currently playing.

This function is available only when the vehicle is not moving.

225

3-3. Using the audio system

226 n

Selecting a desired file by cueing the files in the folder

Touch on the screen.

once again.

When the desired file is reached, touch

File repeat

Touch on the screen.

Folder repeat

Touch and hold

Random playback

on the screen until the “FLD RPT” appears.

n

To play files from a particular folder in random order

Touch on the screen.

n

To play all the files on a disc in random order

Touch and hold on the screen until the “FLD RAND” appears.

n

Canceling random, repeat and scan playback

Touch , n

Error messages

→P. 219

or on the screen once again.

n

CD player protection feature n

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.

If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for extended periods

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

n

Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

3-3. Using the audio system n

MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using MP3 compression.

Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

WMA (Windows Media

TM

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3 format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used.

l

MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)

• MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)

*:

Compatible with VBR l

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and monaural

WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards l

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)

Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)

*

: Only compatible with 2-channel playback

Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status of the

CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

3

227

3-3. Using the audio system l

Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2

CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 level 1, level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters

• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files per disc: 255 l

File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

l

Multi-sessions l

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can be played.

ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

228

3-3. Using the audio system l

MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

Discs that contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data cannot be played.

l

Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

l

Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

3

229

3-3. Using the audio system n

CD-R and CD-RW discs l l

CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been subject to the “finalizing process” (a process that allows discs to be played on a conventional CD player) cannot be played.

It may not be possible to play CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of the unit.

l

It may not be possible to play discs recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and the environment. Record with the correct format. (For details, contact the appropriate application manufacturers of the applications.) l

CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit may be unable to play damaged discs.

l l

If you insert a CD-RW disc into the MP3/WMA player, playback will begin more slowly than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.

Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be played using the DDCD (Double

Density CD) system.

n

Unsuitable discs, and player precautions

→P. 221

230

3-3. Using the audio system

Using the DVD player (if equipped)

Insert a disc or press with a disc inserted.

When you press during the playback of the disc, the following audio/ video control screen appears.

Display audio/video control screen

Select disc

Power Volume

Track, file and chapter selection/fast forward/ rewind

Disc eject

Playback

Disc load

Disc slot

Select file

Change disc

3

231

3-3. Using the audio system

Loading a discs n

Loading a single disc

STEP 1

STEP 2

Push .

When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert a disc after the DVD player door opens.

n

Loading multiple discs

until you hear a beep.

STEP 1

Press and hold

STEP 2

STEP 3

When the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, insert a disc after the DVD player door opens.

After inserting a disc, wait until the indicator changes from flashing amber to green, then insert the next disc after the DVD player door has opened.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have inserted all discs.

STEP 4

To cancel the operation, press the or button. If you do not insert a disc within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.

n

DVD hint screen

This screen appears when a DVD video, DVD audio or video CD is first selected with the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.

Touch read the message.

once you have

232

3-3. Using the audio system

Ejecting discs n

Ejecting a disc

STEP 1

To select the disc to be ejected, touch the desired disc on the screen or press

∧ or ∨ on

.

STEP 2

Press n

Ejecting all discs

and remove the disc.

Press and hold until you hear a beep, then remove the discs.

Selecting a disc n

To select a disc to play

Touch the desired disc on the screen or press

∧ or ∨ on

.

l

Audio CD, CD text

→P. 215 l

MP3/WMA disc

→P. 223 l

DVD video/audio

→P. 234 l

Video CD

→P. 247

3

233

3-3. Using the audio system

Playing DVD video/audio

For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the vehicle is completely stopped with the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode and the parking brake applied. While you are driving, only audio contents may be played.

n

Video control screen

Press while the disc is playing, the following screen appears.

Return to video screen

Change screen mode (

→P. 258)

234

3-3. Using the audio system n

Control icon screen

Touch any part of the screen if no icons are shown while watching video, the following screen appears.

DVD video mode

Return to top menu screen

Page 1

Menu control key

Hide control icons

Go to page 2

Return to menu screen

Rewind

Stop

Fast forward

Playback

Pause

Page 2

Initial DVD setup

Return to page 1

Change angle

Search desired screen

Change subtitle language

Return to menu screen

Change audio language

If appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation relevant to that control is not permitted.

3

235

3-3. Using the audio system

236

DVD audio mode

Return to top menu screen

Page 1

Menu control key

Hide control icons

Go to page 2

Change the audio format

Stop

Rewind

Fast forward

Playback

Pause

Touch and hold

Page 2

or

Initial DVD setup

Select menu number

Return to page 1

Search desired screen

Change angle

Change subtitle language

Return to registered screen

Return to previous screen Go to next screen

If appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation relevant to that control is not permitted.

Fast forwarding/rewinding disc

on the screen or press and hold

∧ or ∨ on until you hear a beep.

3-3. Using the audio system

Slow playback

Touch are touching

and then touch

.

. Video is played slowly while you

Searching a desired screen n

Searching by title (DVD video mode)

in the control icons.

STEP 1

Touch

STEP 2

Input the desired title number and then touch .

: deletes the last input number.

3

: hides the icons. To display the icons, touch .

: returns to previous screen.

n

Searching by group (DVD audio mode)

Touch in the control icons.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Input the group number and then touch .

: deletes the last input number.

: hides the icons. To display the icons, touch .

: returns to previous screen.

237

3-3. Using the audio system n

Playing a bonus group (DVD audio mode only, if the DVD has bonus options)

STEP 1

Touch

STEP 2

in the control icons.

Input the desired bonus group number on the group search screen and touch

: deletes the number.

.

: returns to previous screen.

n

Searching by chapter/track

STEP 2

to select a chapter/track.

Press

∧ or ∨ on n

Selecting a menu number (DVD audio mode only)

Touch in the control icons.

STEP 1

Input the desired menu number on the screen and touch .

238

3-3. Using the audio system

Using the DVD menu

STEP 1

STEP 2

Touch

Touch menu screen.

or in the control icons.

if the menu control key does not appear on the menu item, then touch select.

or a

to

: moves icons up or down.

: hides icons. To display icons, touch .

3

: returns to previous screen.

Note that specific items or the operating method differs from one DVD to another. Refer to the manual that comes with the DVD disc. (The above image is an example.)

Changing the subtitle language

Touch in the control icons.

Each time you touch the button, the next available language is selected.

: hides the control icons.

: returns to previous screen.

239

3-3. Using the audio system

Changing the audio language (DVD video only)

in the control icons.

Touch

Each time you touch the button, the next available language is selected.

: returns to previous screen.

Changing the audio format (DVD audio only)

Touch in the control icons.

Each time you touch the button, the next available audio format is selected.

: returns to previous screen.

240

3-3. Using the audio system

Changing the angle (If the angle option is available)

STEP 1

Touch

STEP 2

in the control icons.

Touch the button.

Each time you touch the button, the next available angle is selected.

: returns to previous screen.

Initial DVD setup n

Displaying “Setup Menu” screen

STEP 1

Touch

STEP 2

in the control icons.

After you change the initial settings, touch .

: restores default settings.

3

241

3-3. Using the audio system n

Setting audio language

STEP 1

Touch

STEP 2

on the “Setup Menu” screen.

Select the desired language.

If you cannot find the desired language, touch desired language code. (

→P. 243)

and input the

: returns to previous screen.

n

Setting subtitle language

Touch on the “Setup Menu” screen.

STEP 1

Select the desired language.

STEP 2

If you cannot find the desired language, touch desired language code. (

→P. 243)

: returns to previous screen.

and input the n

Setting menu language

STEP 1

STEP 2

Touch on the “Setup Menu” screen.

Select the desired language.

If you cannot find the desired language, touch desired language code. (

→P. 243)

and input the

: returns to previous screen.

n

Setting angle mark ON or OFF

If the DVD has angle options, you can turn the angle mark on or off.

Touch on the “Setup Menu” screen. Each time you touch the button, the multi angle mark on the screen turns on or off alternately.

242

3-3. Using the audio system n

Parental lock

STEP 1

Touch

STEP 2

on the “Setup Menu” screen.

Input the 4-digit password and then touch .

If you enter wrong numbers, touch

to delete the numbers.

Touch 10 times to initialize the personal code.

STEP 3

Select a parental level (1 - 8).

: returns to previous screen.

n

Entering a language code

If you touch on the “Select Audio Language” screen, “Select

Subtitle Language” screen or “DVD Language” screen, you can select a language by entering the 4-digit language code if that language is available.

Input the 4-digit language code and then touch .

: deletes the last input digit.

: returns to previous screen.

3

243

3-3. Using the audio system l

Language code

Code Language Code Language Code Language

1001 Japanese 0205 Byelorussian 0704 Scots-Gaelic

0207 Bulgarian 0712 Galician 0514 English

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

1620 Portuguese 0315 Corsican

1922 Swedish 0319 Czech

1821 Russian 0325 Welsh

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0515 Esperanto 0919 Icelandic

0102 Abkhazian 0520 Estonian

0106 Afrikaans 0521 Basque

0113 Amharic 0601 Persian

0118 Arabic 0609 Finnish

0119 Assamese 0610 Fiji

0125 Aymara 0615 Faroese

0126 Azerbaijani 0625 Frisian

0201 Bashkir 0701 Irish

1111

1112

1113

1114

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

1101 Georgian

Kazakh

Greenlandic

Cambodian

Kannada

244

3-3. Using the audio system

Code Language Code Language Code Language

1119

1121

1125

Kashmiri

Kurdish

Kirghiz

1415 Norwegian 1914 Shona

1503 Occitan

(Afan)

1513

Oromo

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian 1201 Latin

1214

1215

Lingala

Laothian

1518 Oriya

1601 Panjabi

1612

1220 Lithuanian 1619

Polish

Pashto,

Pushto

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1222 Latvian

1307 Malagasy

1721 Quechua

1813

Rhaeto-

Romance

1814 Kirundi

1923 Swahili

2001 Tamil

1309 Maori 2005 Telugu

1311

1312

1314

Macedonian 1815 Romanian 2007 Tajik

Malayalam 1823 Kinyarwanda 2008 Thai

Mongolian 1901 Sanskrit 2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen 1315 Moldavian 1904 Sindhi

1318 Marathi 1907 Sangho

1319 Malay

1320 Maltese

Serbo-

1908

Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak 1325 Burmese

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

3

245

3-3. Using the audio system

Code Language Code Language Code Language

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2209 Vietnamese 2515 Yoruba

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2621 Zulu

2126 Uzbek 2408 Xhosa n

Error messages

If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check the region code printed on the DVD matches the player's region code.

If a different message is displayed:

→P. 219

246

3-3. Using the audio system

Playing video CD

For safety reasons, you can enjoy the visual contents of discs only when the vehicle is completely stopped with the engine switch in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode and the parking brake applied. While you are driving, only audio contents may be played.

n

Video control screen

Press while the disc is playing, the following screen appears.

Returning to video screen

3

Changing screen mode (

→P. 258)

247

3-3. Using the audio system n

Control icon screen

Touch any part of the screen if no icons are shown while watching a video CD, the following screen appears.

Search track

Page 1

Hide control icons

Go to page 2

Return to registered screen

Search previous page

Page 2

Change sound-multiplex

Search next menu

Return to page 1

Pause

Rewind

Playback

Fast forward

If appears on the screen when you touch an icon, the operation relevant to that control is not permitted.

248

3-3. Using the audio system

Fast forwarding/rewinding the video CD

Touch and hold or in the control icons or press and hold

until you hear a beep.

∧ or ∨ on

Slow playback

Touch and then touch played slowly while you are touching

Using the video CD menu

in the control icons. Video is

.

3

Touch in the control icons.

Refer to the manual that comes with the video CD for specific menu items.

249

3-3. Using the audio system

Selecting a desired screen n

Searching manually

on the screen, or press

∧ or ∨ on

Touch or until the desired screen appears.

n

Searching by number

in the control icons.

STEP 1

Touch

STEP 2

Changing the sound-multiplex mode

Input the desired track number on the screen and touch .

: deletes the last input number.

: hides icons. To display icons, touch .

: returns to previous screen.

Touch of the control icons. The mode cycles through each time the button is touched.

“Main”

→ “Sub” → “Main/Sub” n

Error messages

If “Region Code Error” is displayed, check the region code printed on the DVD matches the player's region code.

If a different message is displayed:

→P. 219

250

3-3. Using the audio system

DVD player and DVD video disc information

n

DVD video discs

The DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats.

Region code: Some DVD video discs have a region code indicating the region in which you can use the DVD video disc. If the DVD video disc is not labeled as “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it on this DVD player.

If you attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc on this player,

“Region Code Error” appears on the screen. Even if the DVD video disc does not have a region code, you may not be able to use it.

n

Symbols shown on DVD video discs

Mark Meaning

Indicates NTSC format.

Indicates the number of audio tracks.

Indicates the number of language subtitles.

3

Indicates the number of angles.

Indicates the screen display ratios available.

Wide screen: 16:9

Standard: 4:3

Indicates the disc’s region code.

ALL: in all countries

Number: region code

251

3-3. Using the audio system n

DVD compatibility

Audio CDs

DVD video discs

DVD audio discs

Video CDs

Use only discs marked as shown to the left.

The following products may not be playable on your DVD player.

SACDs l l dts-CDs l l

Copy-protected CDs

DVD-Rs l

DVD+Rs l l l

DVD-RWs

DVD+RWs

DVD-ROMs l

DVD-RAMs n l

DVD video disc information

DVD video discs

Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD video discs have adopted

“MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending on the picture format has also been adopted. Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and multi-language features will also help you enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.

252

3-3. Using the audio system l

Viewer restrictions

This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc.

Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced with other scenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.

Level 2-7: DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies can be played.

l

Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.

Multi-angle option

You can enjoy the same scene from different angles.

l l l

Multi-language option

You can select the subtitle and audio languages.

Region codes

The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player. (

→P. 251)

Audio

This DVD player can play linear PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format

DVD. Other decoded types cannot be played.

l

Title and chapter

Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs.

Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio program is assigned as a title.

Chapter: A title is comprised of one or more chapters.

3

253

3-3. Using the audio system n

Sound l l

Dolby Digital

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.

©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U. S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.

Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

DTS

“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered trademarks of Digital Theater

System, Inc.

n

Unsuitable discs, and player precautions

→P. 221

CAUTION n

DVD video precaution

Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a different audio source.

Loud sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume.

254

3-3. Using the audio system

Optimal use of the audio/video system

Press on the panel to display the audio/video control screen.

Operating the radio, cassette player and CD player

Adjust sound quality and balance

Adjust the DSP

Operating the DVD video/audio and video CD

Adjust sound quality and balance

Adjust the DSP

Adjust screen ratio

3

255

3-3. Using the audio system

Adjusting sound quality and balance

STEP 1

Touch on the screen.

STEP 2

Adjust the settings, referring to the following table.

Once you have finished, touch

.

Sound quality mode

High-pitched tones*

Mid-pitched tones*

Low-pitched tones*

Display Level

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

-5 to 5

Touch

or

Front/rear volume balance

F7 to R7

or

Left/right volume balance

L7 to R7 or

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio, cassette tape,

CD or DVD mode.

256

3-3. Using the audio system

Setting DSP

The following features can be set as desired by touching on the screen.

With CD player With DVD player n

Turning Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) ON or OFF

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the noise level as you drive your vehicle.

n

Changing the listening position (vehicles with CD player only)

The speaker balance can be changed to produce the best sound for each listening position.

Touch .

The listening position changes as follows each time the switch is touched.

Display Listening position

Position best suited to the driver's seat

3

Position best suited to the driver's and front passenger’s seat

257

3-3. Using the audio system

Display Listening position

Position best suited to the rear seats

Position best suited to all seats n

Turning the surround ON or OFF (with DVD player only)

Setting the screen ratio mode (with DVD player only)

STEP 1

STEP 2

Touch on the screen.

Touch one of the

or to match screen ratio printed on the

DVD.

,

Screen ratio mode

NORMAL

WIDE1

WIDE2

Details

Suitable for 4:3 screen ratio

Expand the Normal screen horizontally to fill the display.

Suitable for 16:9 screen ratio

258

3-3. Using the audio system

Using the steering switches

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.

Power on, select audio source

Volume

Radio: Select radio stations

Cassette: Fast forward, rewind and selecting tracks

CD: Select tracks, discs and folder 3

DVD: Select tracks, discs and chapter

Turning on the power

Press when the audio system is turned OFF.

The audio system can be turned OFF by holding the switch down for 1 second or more.

Changing the audio source

Press when the audio system is turned ON. The audio source changes as follows each time the button is pressed. If a cassette tape or

CD is not inserted, that mode will be skipped.

Vehicles with CD player:

FM (1, 2)

→cassette player→CD player→AM→SAT (1, 2, 3)

Vehicles with DVD player:

FM (1, 2)

→cassette player→DVD player

→AM→SAT (1, 2, 3)

259

3-3. Using the audio system

Adjusting the volume

Press “+” on ume.

to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the vol-

Hold down the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Selecting a radio station

to select the radio mode.

STEP 1

Press

Press

∧ or ∨ on

STEP 2

to select a radio station.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you hear a beep.

Fast forwarding or rewinding the cassette

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press to select the cassette mode.

Press and hold

∧ or ∨ on

until you hear a beep.

To stop fast forwarding or rewinding, press the same switch.

Selecting a track or chapter (DVD mode only for chapter selection)

STEP 1

Press to select the cassette mode, CD or DVD mode.

Press

∧ or ∨ on

STEP 2

to select the desired track or chapter.

Cassette mode only: you can skips maximum 9 tracks.

Selecting a disc or folder in the CD or DVD player (Folder selection is available only when MP3/WMA disc is in use.)

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press to select the CD or DVD player.

Press and hold

∧ or ∨ on

until you hear a beep.

260

3-3. Using the audio system n

Canceling automatic selection of a radio station

Push the same switch.

CAUTION n

To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

3

261

3-4. Using the hands-free system

Hands-free system

The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your mobile phone without touching it.

This system supports Bluetooth

®

mobile phones. Bluetooth

®

is a wireless data system that allows the mobile phone to wirelessly connect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls.

Telephone switch

Sending/Receiving/“Telephone” screen display (when stopped)

End call

Microphone

The person you are speaking to can be heard from the driver’s side speaker.

To use the hands-free system you must register your Bluetooth

® phone in the system. (

→P. 268)

262

3-4. Using the hands-free system

Status display

You can check such indicators as signal strength and battery charge on the “Telephone” screen.

Connection status

Battery charge

Call area

Signal strength

Indicators

Connection status

Battery charge

Call area

Signal strength

Conditions

Blue: Good

Yellow: Bad

: Not connected

: Full

: Low

“Rm”: Roaming area

“Hm”: Home area

: Good

: Bad

: Not connected

3

263

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

When using the hands-free system l l l

The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.

If both parties speak at the same time it may be difficult to hear.

If the received call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.

l

Try to face the microphone as much as possible when speaking.

n l

In the following circumstances it may be difficult to hear the other party.

• When driving on unsealed roads

• When driving at high speeds

• If the window is open

• If the air-conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone

• If the air-conditioning is set to high

Conditions under which the system will not operate l

If using a mobile phone that does not support Bluetooth

®

.

l

If the mobile phone is switched off.

l

If you are outside service range.

l

If the mobile phone is not connected.

n n l

If the mobile phone's battery is low.

Bluetooth

®

antenna

The antenna is built into the display. If the mobile phone is behind the seat or in the console box, or touching or covered by metal objects, connection status may deteriorate.

Battery charge/Signal status

This display may not correspond exactly with the mobile phone itself.

264

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

About Bluetooth

®

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

n

Compatible models n

Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 and OPP (Object Push Profile)

Ver. 1.1.

Certification for the hands-free system

FCC ID: HYQBT0501A

IC ID: 1551A-BT0501A

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

3

265

3-4. Using the hands-free system

CAUTION n

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Radio Frequency Exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application only and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regulations, must be used with a distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) between the antenna and the body of any person at all time during use.

n

Caution while driving

Do not use the mobile phone or connect the Bluetooth

®

system.

NOTICE n

When leaving the vehicle

Do not leave your mobile phone in the vehicle. The inside of the vehicle may become hot, causing damage to the phone.

266

3-4. Using the hands-free system

Using the Bluetooth

®

phone

Telephone screen

Bluetooth

®

Connection Status

Character Deletion

Display Last

Person Called

Make A Call

To display the screen shown above, press , then touch on the

“Information” screen.

3

267

3-4. Using the hands-free system

Registering a Bluetooth

®

phone

You can register up to 6 phones in the system.

STEP 1

Press .

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch .

STEP 5

Touch .

268

3-4. Using the hands-free system

STEP 6

Input the passkey displayed on screen into your phone.

If the message “Bluetooth* connection successful” is displayed, registration is complete.

If the message “Bluetooth* connection failed. Please check the

“Passkey” and the settings of the telephone” is displayed, start again from the beginning.

Bluetooth

®

phone connection

There are two connection methods available—automatic and manual.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

Touch on the “Information” screen.

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

Choose one of the following methods.

Automatic connection

If the engine switch is in the “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode, the system will automatically connect to the

Bluetooth* phone. Touching automatic connection will turn it ON/

OFF.

Manual connection

If automatic connection fails or is turned OFF, connection must be made manually.

If the message “Bluetooth* connection successful” is displayed, connection is complete.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

269

3

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

Reconnecting to the Bluetooth

®

phone

If the system cannot connect due to poor signal strength with the engine switch in the “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode, the system will automatically attempt to reconnect.

If the phone is turned off, the system will not attempt to reconnect. In this case, connection must be made manually, or the phone must be re-selected.

Making a call n

Dialing

Once the Bluetooth

® following procedure.

phone is registered, you can make a call using the

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

To delete the input phone number, touch ţ.

STEP 3

Touch on the “Information” screen.

Inputting the phone number.

To delete the input phone number, touch .

To dial the last input phone number, touch .

STEP 4

Touch or press the on the steering wheel.

270

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

Dialing from the phone book

You can dial a number from the phone book data imported from your mobile phone. Up to 1000 entries may be stored in the phone book.

(

→P. 290)

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

STEP 3

Touch on the “Information” screen.

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 4

Choose the data to call from the list.

3

STEP 5

Choose the number and then touch or press the on the steering wheel.

271

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

Dialing from history

You can make a call from past dialed numbers or received calls.

Up to 5 numbers are stored, with the last recent number being deleted to make room for a new number.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

STEP 3

Touch on the “Information” screen.

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 4

Choose the number to call from the list.

To choose a number from the incoming calls history, touch

and choose a number to call.

STEP 5

or press the on Touch the steering wheel.

272

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

Calling using speed dial

You can make a call using numbers registered from the phone book and call history. (

→P. 281)

STEP 1

Press .

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

on the “Telephone” screen.

Choose the desired number to make a call.

To change the page, touch

or .

3

273

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

Calling using voice recognition

Using voice recognition, you can call by name from the “Phone Book” screen, call by number from the “Telephone” screen, and send tones from the “Call” screen.(

→P. 278)

Talk switch l

Calling by name from the “Phone Book” screen

STEP 1

Press the talk switch.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say the desired name.

If there are multiple entries for the same name, “Next” will be displayed.

To select the next candidate, touch or say “Next candidate”.

Following the system guidance, press the talk switch.

Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say

“Dial”.

274

3-4. Using the hands-free system l

Calling by number from the “Telephone” screen

STEP 1

Press the talk switch.

STEP 2

Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say the desired number.

Following the system guidance, press the talk switch.

STEP 3

STEP 4

Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say

“Dial”.

l

Sending tones from the “Call” screen

Press the talk switch.

STEP 1

3

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say the desired number.

Following the system guidance, press the talk switch.

Following the system guidance, wait until the beep and then say

“Yes”.

n

Calling using POI

You can make a call using a Point Of Interest. (

→“Navigation System

Owner’s Manual”)

275

276

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

Made/Received call history list l l

If you make a call to or receive a call from a number registered in the phone book, the name is displayed in the call history.

If you make multiple calls to the same number, only the last call made is displayed in the made calls history.

l l

is displayed to the left of phone number for unanswered calls.

Calls where the number is unavailable, such as public telephones, are not stored in the call history.

n

When driving l

The functions “Dialing”, “Dialing from the phone book”, and “Dialing from history” are unavailable.

n l

If you press the on the steering wheel, the “Speed Dial” screen is displayed.

At this time phone numbers will not be displayed. Choose from the names displayed to make a call.

International calls

You may not be able to make international calls, depending on the mobile phone in use.

n

To display the voice recognition command list

STEP 1

After pressing the talk switch, press . If the “Operating

Guide” screen is displaying, press

.

STEP 2

Press .

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

To display the voice recognition operating guide

STEP 1

After pressing the talk switch, press . If the “Command

List” screen is displaying, press

.

Press .

STEP 2 n

To cancel voice recognition l

Press and hold the talk switch.

l

Press on the steering wheel.

l

Say “Cancel”.

l

Press . (excluding command verification) n

When using voice recognition

Use correct commands and speak clearly, otherwise the system may not correctly recognize the command. Wind or other noises may also cause the system not to recognize the desired command.

3

Receiving a call

When a call is received, the following screen is displayed together with a sound.

Touch or press the on the steering wheel.

277

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

To refuse a call

Touch and hold .

n

To adjust the received call volume

Press the or . You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches.

n

International calls

Received international calls may not be displayed correctly, depending on the mobile phone in use.

Speaking on the phone

The following screen is displayed when speaking on the phone.

n

To adjust the received call volume

Press the or . You can also adjust the volume using the steering switches.

n

To prevent the other party from hearing your voice

Touch the .

n

Inputting a key

When using phone services such as an answering service or a bank, you can store phone numbers and code numbers in the phone book.

278

3-4. Using the hands-free system

Touch .

STEP 1

Input the number.

STEP 2

If repeated tone symbols* are stored in the phone book, and right side of the screen.

are displayed on the

STEP 3

*: Repeated tone symbols are symbols or numbers displayed as p or w, that come after the phone number.

(e.g. 056133p0123w#1

]

)

Confirm the number displayed on screen, and touch

, operation is completed without making a call.

If you touch

.

n

To transfer a call

Touch .

n

To hang up

3

Touch or press the on the steering wheel.

n

Transferring calls l l

It is not possible to transfer from hands-free to the mobile phone while driving.

If you transfer from the mobile phone to hands-free, the hands-free screen will be displayed, and you can operate the system using the screen.

l

Transfer method and operation may vary according to the mobile phone used.

n l

For operation of the mobile phone in use, see the phone's manual.

To send a tone by speed tone

Touch list displayed.

then touch . Choose the desired number from the speed tone n

While driving

Key input is unavailable.

279

3-4. Using the hands-free system

Setting the hands-free system

You can speed dial, register in and edit the phone book, and set the

Bluetooth

®

phone.

Settings screen

Connection

Method

To display the screen shown above, press , touch on the

“Information” screen, then touch on the “Telephone” screen.

280

3-4. Using the hands-free system

Registering/Deleting a speed dial item n

Registering a speed dial item

You can register a number from the phone book or the call history. Up to 17 entries may be stored.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

switch on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 3

Touch the

STEP 4

STEP 5

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

Touch in the “Speed

Dial” section of the “Speed Dial

Settings” screen.

3

STEP 6

Select the data to be registered.

281

3-4. Using the hands-free system

STEP 7

STEP 8

Select the number to be registered.

Press the desired switch.

The last dialed number will be registered in position 6.

n

Deleting a speed dial item

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press .

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

Touch the switch on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 4

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

Touch in the “Speed Dial” section of the “Speed Dial

Settings” screen.

Select the data to be deleted.

A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch .

282

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

To delete all speed dial items

Follow the steps for “Deleting a speed dial item” to “STEP 5”. In the “Speed Dial” section of the “Speed Dial Settings” screen, touch the message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch .

. A confirmation

Registering/Editing/Deleting a Speed Tone n

Registering a speed tone

You can register up to 6 items.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press .

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

Touch

Tone” section.

in the “Speed

3

STEP 6

Input the desired name and touch

.

, : Letter input

: Number/Symbol input

: Space

: Backspace

283

3-4. Using the hands-free system

STEP 7

STEP 8

Input the number and touch

.

Touch the desired switch.

n

Editing a speed tone

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press .

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

Touch

Settings” screen.

in the “Speed Tone” section of the “Speed Dial

Touch the switch to be edited.

284

3-4. Using the hands-free system

STEP 7

Input the name and touch

STEP 8

Input the number and touch n

Deleting a speed tone

Press .

STEP 1

.

.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Touch on the “Information” screen.

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

Touch in the “Speed Tone” section of the “Speed Dial

Settings” screen.

Choose the data to delete.

A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch .

3 n

To delete all speed tone data

Follow the steps “Deleting a speed tone” to “STEP 5”. In the “Speed Tone” section, touch touch .

. A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct,

285

3-4. Using the hands-free system

Setting the volume

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

STEP 5

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

Touch or to lower or raise the volume.

Voice Volume: Change the speaker volume

Ring Volume: Change the ring volume n

Adaptive Volume Control n

When traveling at 50 mph (80 km/h) or over, the system automatically raises the volume one level.

If the vehicle’s speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h), the volume will return to its original level.

You can turn this function ON/OFF by touching .

To return to the default volume settings

286

3-4. Using the hands-free system

Changing the screen settings

The following settings can be changed.

“Incoming Call Display”

The incoming call screen settings can be changed.

“Auto Answer”

When a call is received, the system automatically switches to the talking screen after the set period of time, meaning you can speak without pressing anything.

“Show Bluetooth* connection status at startup”

You can set the system to show the status confirmation display when connecting.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

3

287

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

“Incoming Call Display” settings

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

STEP 5

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

Select the desired switch.

: The hands-free screen is displayed when a call is received, and you can operate the system from that screen.

: A message is displayed at the top of the screen, and you can only operate the system with the steering switches.

n

“Auto Answer” settings

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

Touch tings” screen.

in the “Auto Answer” section of the “Screen Set-

Set the wait time using and . (1 - 60 seconds)

288

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

“Show Bluetooth* connection status at startup” settings

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

Touch / in the “Show Bluetooth* connection

STEP 5 status at startup” section of the “Screen Settings” screen.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

n

To set the screen settings to default

3

289

3-4. Using the hands-free system

Phone book settings

Up to 1000 names, 2 items per name, can be registered.

n

Transferring mobile phone data

Press .

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Touch on the “Information” screen.

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 4

STEP 5

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

Touch .

STEP 6

Select the group to transfer to.

290

3-4. Using the hands-free system

STEP 7

To overwrite data, touch

.

To add to existing data, touch

.

STEP 8

Transfer will begin. If you wish to cancel the transfer before finished, touch .

Transfer is complete when “Transfer completed” is displayed.

If “Transfer failed” is displayed, restart the process from the beginning.

3 n

Registering by input

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 4

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

STEP 5

Touch the

Book” section.

in the “Phone

291

3-4. Using the hands-free system

STEP 6

Choose the switch to register.

STEP 7

Once input is complete, touch .

: Input the name on the

“Name” screen.

, :

Input the number(s) on the “Telephone Number” screen. When you touch , the “Select

Icon” screen will appear.

Choose the desired icon.

: Select the desired group from the “Select Group” screen. (No Group, 01 -

09)

: Select the desired phone number and touch

to record a voice tag.

To play the voice tag, touch . touch .

To delete the voice tag,

292

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

Add history data to a registered entry

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

STEP 4

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

Choose the desired number from the list.

To choose from the received call history, touch desired number.

Touch .

STEP 5

then select the

3

STEP 6

STEP 7

Choose the phone book entry to be added to.

Check the data to be added, then touch .

293

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

Editing phone book data

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

Touch in the “Phone Book” section of the “Phone Book

Management” screen.

Choose the data to edit.

Choose the switch to edit.

After editing, press .

STEP 8 n

Deleting phone book data

Press .

STEP 1

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

Touch in the “Phone Book” section of the “Phone Book

Management” screen.

Select the data to delete.

A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch .

294

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

To delete all data

Follow the steps “Deleting phone book data” to “STEP 5”. In the “Phone Book” section of the “Phone Book Management” screen, touch within a group, touch tact data, touch

.

. To delete all data

, then select the group to delete. To delete all con-

. Check that everything is correct, then touch n

Registering/Editing/Deleting from the phone book

You can register data in the phone book, edit registered data, and delete items.

Press .

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Touch on the “Information” screen.

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 4

To register data, touch

To delete all data, touch

on the “Phone Book” screen.

.

To delete or edit specific data, select the data to delete/edit, then touch

to delete, or to edit.

n

The phone book

The method for transferring phone book data from the phone to the system varies with phone model. See the phone’s manual.

3

295

3-4. Using the hands-free system

Changing the phone book group name settings n

Registering a group name

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

Touch the switch in the “Group Name” section of the

“Phone Book Management” screen.

Select the group to register (“01” - “19”).

STEP 7

Select the switch to be edited.

: The below screen will be displayed. Select the desired icon.

: Input the name on the

“Name” screen.

STEP 8

Once editing is complete, touch .

296

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

Deleting a group name

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

Touch the switch in the “Group Name” section of the

“Phone Book Management” screen.

Select the group name to delete.

A confirmation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch .

3 n

To delete all data

Follow the steps “Deleting phone book data” procedure to “STEP 5”. In the “Phone

Book” section of the “Phone Book Management” screen, touch mation message will be displayed. If everything is correct, touch .

. A confir-

297

3-4. Using the hands-free system

298

Deleting the history

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

STEP 4

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

Select the data to delete from the list.

To delete data from the received calls history, touch select the data to delete.

STEP 5

Touch .

, then

.

n

STEP 6

Check that everything is correct, then touch

To delete all data

Follow the steps “Deleting a group name” to “STEP 4”. Touch going Calls” screen. To delete all received call history data, touch touch . Check that everything is correct, then touch

on the “Out-

, then

.

Changing the security settings

You can disable certain hands-free system functions. Use the security settings when you do not wish other people to see the registered data, for example when having the vehicle valet parked at a hotel.

To enable or disable security, the security code (4 digits) is required. The default code is “0000”. Be sure to change the security code before use.

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

Changing the security code

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

STEP 5

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

Touch rity Code” section.

in the “Secu-

3

STEP 6

Input the current security code, and touch .

STEP 7

STEP 8

Input the new security code, and touch .

A confirmation message will appear. If everything is correct, touch .

299

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

Enabling security

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

Touch in the “Phone Book Lock” section of the “Phone

STEP 5

Book Lock” screen.

STEP 6

Input the security code, and touch n

Setting the security code to default

.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 4

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

STEP 6

STEP 7

on the “Phone Book Lock” screen.

STEP 5

Touch

Input the security code on the “Security Code” screen, then touch .

A confirmation message will appear. If everything is correct, touch .

300

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

If the “Phone Book Lock” is set l

If the security code is input and the “Phone Book Lock” set, the following functions are locked.

Display of the phone book screen and transferring, registering, editing, deleting the phone book data.

l l

Display of speed dial screen, registering, deleting the speed dial and speed dialing.

Display of the other party's name for calls being received or made.

l l l

Displayed of dialed numbers screen and received calls screen, deleting dialed numbers and received numbers.

Display of phone information screen.

Changing the security code.

The speed dial screen is not displayed while driving.

n l

When changing the security code

Be sure to choose a number difficult for strangers to guess.

l

Do not forget the security code. Even your Lexus dealer will be unable to disable the security. If you do forget the code, initialize all personal data. (

→P. 187)

3

301

3-4. Using the hands-free system

302

Setting a Bluetooth

®

phone n

Selecting a Bluetooth

®

phone

If multiple Bluetooth

®

phones are registered, follow the below procedure to select the Bluetooth

®

phone to be used. You may only use one phone at a time.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press .

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch .

STEP 5

Select the phone to be use, then touch .

If no phones are registered,

“Empty” will be displayed.

If “Bluetooth* connection successful” is displayed, registration was successful.

If another Bluetooth

®

phone is already connected, a confirmation message is displayed. Touch

or .

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

Displaying Bluetooth

®

information

You can check the device address and device name.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press .

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

On the “Select Telephone” screen, select the desired phone and touch .

To change the device name, touch

in the “Device Name” section, and input the name on the

“Name” screen (max. 20 characters).

3 n

To change the Bluetooth

®

settings

You can change the device name and passkey.

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

STEP 3

Touch on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 4

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

303

3-4. Using the hands-free system

To change the device name, touch

STEP 5

in the “Device Name” section, and input the name on the

“Name” screen (max. 20 characters).

To change the passkey, touch

in the “Passkey” section, and input 4 - 8 digits on the “Passkey” screen.

n

Setting the Bluetooth

®

settings to default

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

STEP 5

STEP 6

Touch on the “Bluetooth* Settings” screen.

A confirmation message is displayed. If everything is correct, touch .

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

304

3-4. Using the hands-free system n

To delete the Bluetooth

®

settings

STEP 1

Press .

STEP 2

Touch on the “Information” screen.

on the “Telephone” screen.

STEP 3

Touch

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

Touch on the “Settings” screen.

Touch in the “Bluetooth* Telephone” section of the

“Bluetooth* Settings” screen.

On the “Delete Telephone” screen, select the phone to delete.

To check the device address, touch .

STEP 7

If you touch , a confirmation message is displayed. If everything is correct, touch .

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

3

305

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Illuminated entry system: The various lights automatically turn on/off according to the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, whether the doors are open/closed, and the engine switch mode.

Outer foot light

Steering spot light

Front personal lights (

→P. 308)

Shift lever light

Front interior lights (

→P. 308)

306

3-5. Using the interior lights

Inside door handle lights

Rear personal lights (

→P. 308)

Rear interior lights

Door courtesy lights

Foot light

Front scuff light

When the instrument panel light control switch is turned to minimum, the foot lights, inside door handle lights and shift lever light will turn off. (

→P. 107) n

To prevent battery discharge n

If the interior lights, personal lights and steering spot light remain ON when the door is not fully closed or the interior light switch in “DOOR” position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

Customization

Setting (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. ( → P. 526)

3

307

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights

Personal lights

Front

“ON”

“OFF”

“DOOR”

The interior lights are turned on/off by the illuminated entry system.

ON/OFF

308

Rear n

Customization

Settings can be changed. (

→P. 526)

ON/OFF

3-5. Using the interior lights

3

309

310

3-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features

Storage compartment

Glove box

Overhead console (vehicles without Lexus Link System)

Door pocket

Cup holders

Coin holder

Console box

3-6. Using the storage features

Glove box

Open (push button)

Lock with the mechanical key

Unlock with the mechanical key n

Glove box light

The glove box light turns on when the headlight switch is on.

n

Trunk opener main switch

The trunk opener main switch is located in the glove box. (

→ P. 22)

CAUTION n

Caution while driving

Keep the glove box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Console box

Pull up the lever to release the lock.

Slide armrest.

Lift the armrest to open.

3

311

312

3-6. Using the storage features n

Console box light

The console box light turn on when the headlight switch is on.

CAUTION n

Caution while driving

Keep the console box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

Overhead console (vehicles without Lexus Link System)

The overhead console is useful for temporarily storing sunglasses and similar small items.

n n

CAUTION

Items that should not be left in the overhead console

Do not leave glasses or lighters in the console.

If the interior of the vehicle becomes hot, lighters may explode and glasses may warp or become cracked.

Caution while driving

Do not leave the overhead console open. Items may fall out and cause injury.

3-6. Using the storage features

Storage compartment

CAUTION n

Caution while driving

Do not leave the storage compartment open.

The opened compartment many hit your body or items may be thrown out of the compartment in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.

3

Coin holder

Pull up lever to release the lock.

Slide armrest.

313

314

3-6. Using the storage features

Cup holders

Front

To open, press down and release the cup holder lid.

Rear

To open, press in and release the rear cup holder on the armrest.

CAUTION n n

Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

When not in use

Keep the cup holders closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

3-6. Using the storage features

Door pockets

The door pocket can be opened and closed.

CAUTION n

Caution while driving

Keep the door pockets closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

3

315

316

3-7. Other interior features

Sun visors

Forward position: Flip down.

Side position: Flip down, unhook, and swing to the side.

Side extender: Place in side position, then slide backwards.

3-7. Other interior features

Vanity mirror

The light turns on when the cover is opened.

3

317

318

3-7. Other interior features

Clock

n

Adjust clock

With navigation system:

→ “Navigation System Owner's Manual”.

Without navigation system: Perform the following steps.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press .

Touch .

STEP 3

Adjust hours.

Adjust minutes.

Round the nearest hour.

Turn daylight saving time on.

Turn daylight saving time off.

After setting, touch .

n

The clock is displayed when n

The engine switch is in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.

When the battery is disconnected

The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.

3-7. Other interior features

Outside temperature display

The displayed temperature ranges from -40°F (-40°C) up to 122°F

(50°C).

Instrument panel

Multi-information display

Push the “DISP” button on the steering switch. (

→P. 113)

3 n

Operating conditions

The engine switch is in “IG-ON” mode.

n

When --- is displayed

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

319

3-7. Other interior features

Ashtrays

Front

Slide the lid back to open.

Push the lever to remove the ashtray.

Push the lid to close.

Rear

Pull the ashtray lid to open.

Hold the plate down and pull the ashtray upwards to remove.

CAUTION n

When not in use

Keep the ashtray closed. Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.

NOTICE n

To prevent fire l

Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray, then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.

l

Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.

320

3-7. Other interior features

Cigarette lighter

n

The cigarette lighter can be used when

The engine switch is in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.

CAUTION n

To avoid burns or fires l

Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.

l l

Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.

Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.

Slide the lid back to open, and push the cigarette lighter down.

The cigarette lighter will pop up when ready for use.

3

321

3-7. Other interior features

Power outlet

The power outlet can be used for 12V accessories that run on less than

10A.

n

The power outlet can be used when

The engine switch is in “ACC” or “IG-ON” mode.

NOTICE n

To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short circuit.

n

To prevent the fuse from being blown n

Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12V/10A.

To prevent battery discharge

Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

322

3-7. Other interior features

Seat heaters (if equipped)

Heats the seats

The indicator light comes on.

The higher the number, the warmer the seats become.

n

The seat heaters can be used when

The engine switch is in “IG-ON” mode.

n

When not in use

Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off.

CAUTION n l

Burns

Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) l

Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.

3

323

3-7. Other interior features

NOTICE n

To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects

(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

n

To prevent battery discharge

Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.

324

3-7. Other interior features

Seat heaters and ventilators (if equipped)

The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good airflow by blowing air from the seats.

Heats the seats

The indicator light (red) comes on.

The higher the number, the warmer the seats become.

Blows air from the seats

The indicator light (green) comes on.

The higher the number, the stronger the airflow becomes.

3 n

The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when

The engine switch is in “IG-ON” mode.

n

When not in use

Set the dial to “0”. The indicator light turns off.

n

CAUTION l

Burns

Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping drugs, cold remedies, etc.) l

Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.

325

3-7. Other interior features

NOTICE n

To prevent seat heater damage

Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp objects

(needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

n

To prevent battery discharge

Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.

326

3-7. Other interior features

Armrest

Pull the armrest down for use.

NOTICE n

To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not place too much strain on the armrest.

3

327

3-7. Other interior features

Rear sunshade

The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered by pressing the switch shown below.

Raise/lower n

The rear sunshade can be used when

The engine switch is in “IG-ON” mode.

n

Reverse operation feature l

To ensure adequate rear visibility, the sunshade automatically lowers when the shift lever is shifted to “R”.

However, the rear sunshade is raised again if any of the following occurs:

Shift the shift lever into “P”.

l

The switch is pressed again.

l

The shift lever is shifted out of “R”, and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h).

If the engine is turned off when the rear sunshade has been lowered due to the reverse operation feature, it will not be raised even when the engine is turned on again and the vehicle reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h). To raise the sunshade again, press the switch.

n

After the engine switch is turned “OFF”

The rear sunshade can be raised and lowered for approximately 1 minute.

n

Customization

Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates can be changed.

(

→P. 523)

328

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION n

When the rear sunshade is being raised or lowered

Do not place fingers or other objects in the fastener section or in the opening.

They may get caught, causing injury.

NOTICE n

To prevent battery discharge

Do not operate the rear sunshade when the engine is not running.

n

To ensure normal operation of the sunshade

Observe the following precautions.

l

Do not place excessive load on the motor or other components.

l

Do not place objects where they may hinder opening and closing operations.

l l

Do not attach items to the rear sunshade.

Keep the opening clean and clear of obstructions.

l

Do not operate the rear sunshade continuously over long periods of time.

3

329

3-7. Other interior features

Floor mats

Securely place a mat that matches the size of the space on the carpet.

Secure the floor mat using the hooks provided.

CAUTION n

When inserting the floor mat

Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the vehicle carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident.

330

3-7. Other interior features

Trunk features

n

Cargo hooks n

Shopping bag hooks n

First-aid kit storage belt

Cargo hooks are provided for securing loose items.

3

Loosen

Tighten

331

3-7. Other interior features n

Luggage mat

Trunk storage extension

Pull the lever upwards when lifting the luggage mat up.

The lever can be hooked on the edge of the trunk.

Pull down the rear seat center armrest.

Open (push down the handle)

Lock with the mechanical key

Unlock with the mechanical key

332

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION n

Caution while driving l

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they are not in use.

l

Always keep the trunk storage extension doors closed to reduce the chance of injury in case of accident or sudden stop.

NOTICE n

When closing the trunk

Do not leave the luggage mat lever hooked on the edge of the trunk.

The luggage mat may get damaged.

3

333

3-7. Other interior features

Garage door opener

The garage door opener can be programmed to operate garage doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting systems, and security systems, and other devices.

The garage door opener (HomeLink

® under license from HomeLink

®

.

Universal Transceiver) is manufactured

Programming the HomeLink

®

(for U.S.A. owners)

The HomeLink

®

compatible transceiver in your vehicle has 3 buttons which can be programmed to operate 3 different devices. Refer to the programming method below appropriate for the device.

Indicator

Buttons n

Programming the HomeLink

®

STEP 1

Point the remote control for the device 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) from the HomeLink

®

control buttons.

Keep the indicator light on the

HomeLink

®

in view while programming.

334

3-7. Other interior features

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

Press and hold down one of the buttons on the HomeLink

®

and the button on the transmitter.

When the indicator light on the

HomeLink

®

changes from a slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both buttons.

Test the operation of the

HomeLink

®

by pressing the newly programmed button.

If programming a garage door opener, check to see if the garage door opens and closes. If the garage door does not operate, see if your garage transmitter is of the

Rolling Code type. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink

®

button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink

®

) flashes rapidly for 2 seconds and then remains lit. If your transmitter is the

Rolling Code type, proceed to the heading “Programming a rolling code system”.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink

®

buttons.

3

335

3-7. Other interior features n

Programming a Rolling Code system (for U.S.A. owners)

If your device is Rolling Code equipped, follow the steps under the heading “Programming the HomeLink

®

” before proceeding with the steps listed below.

Locate the training button on the ceiling mounted garage door

STEP 1 opener motor. The exact location and color of the button may vary by brand of garage door opener.

Refer to the operation manual supplied with the garage door opener for the location of the training button.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Press the training button.

Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink

®

button twice. The garage door may open.

If the garage door opens, the programming process is complete. If the door does not open, press and release the button a third time. This third press and release will complete the programming process by opening the garage door.

STEP 4

The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now recognize the HomeLink

®

transceiver and operate the garage door.

Repeat the steps above to program another rolling code system for any of the remaining HomeLink

®

buttons.

n

Programming an entry gate (for U.S.A. owners)/Programming all devices in the Canadian market

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

Place your transmitter 1 to 3 in. (25 to 75 mm) away from the surface of the HomeLink

®

.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink

®

in view while programming.

Press and hold the selected HomeLink

®

button.

Repeatedly press and release (cycle) the device’s remote control button for two seconds each until step 4 is complete.

When the indicator light on the HomeLink

®

compatible transceiver start to flashing rapidly, release the buttons.

336

3-7. Other interior features

STEP 5

STEP 6

Test the operation of the HomeLink

®

by pressing the newly programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

Repeat the steps above to program another device for each of the remaining HomeLink

®

buttons.

n

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as home security systems, home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus dealer for assistance.

n

Reprogramming a button

The individual HomeLink

®

buttons cannot be erased but can be reprogrammed. To reprogram a button, follow the “Basic programming” instructions.

3

Operating the HomeLink

®

Press the appropriate HomeLink

®

button. The HomeLink

®

indicator light on the HomeLink

®

transceiver should turn on.

The HomeLink

®

continues to send a signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is pressed.

®

memory (all three programs) Erasing the entire HomeLink

Press and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the indicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored in the

HomeLink

®

memory.

337

3-7. Other interior features n

Before programming n l l

Install a new battery in the transmitter.

The battery side of the transmitter must be pointed away from the HomeLink

Certification for the garage door opener

®

.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of the IC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and complies with FCC and IC rules.

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

n

CAUTION

When programming a garage door or other remote control device n

The garage door may operate, so ensure people and objects are out of danger to prevent potential harm.

Conforming to federal safety standards

Do not use the HomeLink

®

Compatible Transceiver with any garage door opener or device that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by federal safety standards.

This includes any garage door that cannot detect an obstruction object. A door or device without these features increases the risk of death or serious injury.

338

3-7. Other interior features

Compass

The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in which the vehicle is heading.

n

Operation

To turn the compass on or off, push “AUTO” for longer than 3 seconds.

n

Displays and directions

Display

N

NE

E

SE

S

SW

W

NW

Direction

North

Northeast

East

Southeast

South

Southwest

West

Northwest

3

339

3-7. Other interior features

Calibrating the compass

The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the vehicle.

If you cross over a map boundary shown in illustration, the compass will deviate.

To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.

n

Deviation calibration

STEP 1

STEP 2

Stop the vehicle where it is safe to drive in a circle.

Press “AUTO” until a number (1 to

15) appears on the compass display.

340

STEP 3

Press “AUTO”, and referring to the map above, select the number of the zone where you are.

3-7. Other interior features

STEP 4

Wait a few seconds until the compass direction is displayed.

The calibration is complete.

n

Circling calibration

If “CAL” appears on the display, drive the vehicle at 5 mph (8 km/ h) or less in a circle until a direction is displayed.

If there is not enough space to drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is displayed.

3 n

Conditions unfavorable to correct operation l

The compass may not show the correct direction in the following conditions: l

The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.

The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

l

The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).

l l

The vehicle has become magnetized.

(There is a magnet or metal object near the inside rear view mirror.)

The battery has been disconnected.

l

A door is open.

341

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION n

Caution while driving

Do not adjust the display.

Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is stopped.

n

When doing the circling calibration

Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling calibration.

NOTICE n

To avoid the compass malfunctions

Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the inside rear view mirror.

Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.

n

To ensure normal operation of the compass l

Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.

l

During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.

342

3-7. Other interior features

Lexus Link System (if equipped)

The Lexus Link System is a communication service that uses Global Positioning System (GPS) data and cellular service to provide you with safety, security and convenience. This system is only operational in GPS and cellular coverage areas. Button operation and voice commands are used to operate the system. To operate the system, follow the voice guidance instructions. For details about service and subscription, call the Lexus Link

Call Center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free).

n

Buttons

Voice keypad button

Volume control

Phone button

“SERVICES” button

Emergency button n

Services

The Lexus Link System offers the following services.

l

Airbag deployment notification (

→P. 345) l

Emergency assistance (

→P. 345) l

Stolen vehicle location assistance (

→P. 346) l

Remote horn/lights and remote door lock/unlock (

→P. 346) l

Advisor record (

→P. 347) l

Personal calling (

→P. 347) l

Other services (

→P. 346)

Operating the Lexus Link System during a Bluetooth

® minate the Bluetooth phone call.

phone call will ter-

3

343

3-7. Other interior features

Safety information for the Lexus Link System

Important! Read this information before using the Lexus Link System.

n

Exposure to radio frequency signals

The Lexus Link System installed in your vehicle is a low power ratio transmitter and receiver. When the engine switch is in the “ON” position, it receives and also sends radio frequency (RF) signals.

In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies.

l

ANSI (American National Standards Institute) C95.1 [1992] l

NCRP (National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement)

Report 86 [1986] l

ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) [1996]

Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, government health agencies, and industry reviewed the available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard

(C95.1).

The design of the Lexus Link System complies with the FCC guidelines in addition to those standards.

344

3-7. Other interior features

Indicator and warning lights

Operation indicator light

If your subscription has expired, the operation indicator light will go off.

Warning light

If the warning light (red light) comes on, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

Airbag deployment notification

If an airbag deploys, an emergency call is automatically placed to the Lexus

Link Call Center, and your vehicle’s location is identified. The Lexus Link

Advisor will attempt to contact you and assess the situation. The Advisor can quickly contact the nearest emergency services provider, describe the situation and request that assistance be sent to your location.

3

The Lexus Link Advisor can, if requested, connect you to an emergency services operator.

Emergency assistance

When you press the button, a priority call is placed to the Lexus Link

Call Center with your vehicle’s location. At the Call Center, the Lexus Link

Advisor can determine your vehicle’s location, communicate with you, and, if appropriate, contact the nearest emergency service provider.

If you have accidentally pressed the button, tell the Lexus Link Advisor that you are not experiencing an emergency.

345

3-7. Other interior features

Stolen vehicle location assistance

If your vehicle is stolen, call the Lexus Link Call Center at 1-800-25-

LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free) and select the option for Lexus Link.

To protect subscribers’ privacy, the location of a vehicle will not be provided to anyone other than a law enforcement authority.

Remote horn/lights and remote door lock/unlock

The remote operations are performed by contacting the Lexus Link Call

Center from the outside of the vehicle. When necessary, call the Lexus Link

Call Center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free) and select the option for Lexus Link.

l

In the case that you forget to lock the vehicle or you are locked out, the

Lexus Link Call Center can send a signal to lock or unlock the vehicle remotely.

l

In the case that you forget where you parked the vehicle, such as in a large parking lot, the Lexus Link Call Center can send a signal to flash the headlights and sound the horn to help you locate the vehicle.

When contacting the Lexus Link Call Center from the outside of the vehicle, you need the Lexus Link PIN (Personal Identification Number). Write the PIN down and carry it with you.

Other services

Press the button in the vehicle or call the Lexus Link Call Center at 1-

800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free), and then select the option for Lexus Link. The services provided will depend on the service plan level.

346

3-7. Other interior features

Advisor record n

Recording a conversation with an advisor

Press the button to record a conversation. To stop recording, press the button again.

• Up to 2 minutes of recording time is available.

• Recording a new conversation deletes the previously recorded conversation.

n

Playing the recorded conversation

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press the or button.

Say “Advisor playback”.

Press the button again to stop the playback.

3

To restart the playback, press the button, say “Advisor playback” and then select either of the following methods.

• Say “Resume” to resume the playback.

• Say “Play” to start from the beginning.

Personal calling

The hands-free personal calling feature can be added to the Lexus Link

System as an option. You can purchase a package of minutes that works best for you. As you make and receive calls, minutes are deducted from your plan. They are easily billed to a credit card that is kept on file so no separate phone bill is needed.

Personal calling universal voice recognition commands:

• “Help” The system will provide a list of available commands.

• “Clear” When you are entering digits, this command will erase the last digit entered.

• “Cancel” This command takes you from the current function to the “Lexus

Link ready” prompt. If the last response from the system was “Lexus Link ready”, this command will exit voice mode.

347

3-7. Other interior features

Voice recognition error message:

• “Pardon” The system responds with this message if the system does not recognize your voice command properly. Say the command slowly again.

After the third time this happens, the system will try to guess the command you are requesting. If correct, say “Yes”. If not, say “No”, and the system will prompt you with its next-best guess.

• “Slower please” The system responds with this message if you say a command before the system is ready to listen or if your voice command cannot be recognized because of substantial background noise. Try to wait slightly longer before speaking.

n

There are 5 ways to make a call.

Dialing a specific number

STEP 1

Press the button. When the system responds with “Lexus

Link ready”, say “Dial”.

STEP 2

When the system responds with “Phone number to dial please”, say the entire number you wish to dial without pausing.

The system will repeat the number and ask “Yes or No”.

STEP 3

Say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).

STEP 4

STEP 5

The system responds with “Dialing” (your call will then be connected).

Dialing digit-by-digit (“Digit Dial”)

“Digit Dial” enables you to dial a phone number by individual digit. This is helpful when there is background noise and also improves voice recognition.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Press the button. When the system responds with “Lexus

Link ready”, say “Digit dial”.

When the system responds with “Digit please”, say the first digit of the number to be dialed and wait for it to be repeated back to you.

Continue one digit at a time until all digits are entered.

348

3-7. Other interior features

STEP 4

When finished, say “Dial”. The system responds with “Dialing” and your call is placed.

If you have problems storing a number using the continuous number method, you can store numbers one digit at a time using “Digit Store”.

Simply follow the instructions above for “Digit Dial”, except say “Digit

Store” in STEP 1 and “Store” in STEP 4.

Dialing a phone number saved as a nametag

A nametag is a convenient way to store important or frequently called phone numbers for easy access at any time. To do this, choose a frequently-called number to store, the example below uses your home telephone number.

l

How to store a nametag

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

Press the button. When the system responds with “Lexus

Link ready”, say “Store”.

When the system responds with “Phone number to store, please”, say the entire number you wish to store with no pauses. The system will repeat the number and ask “Yes or No”.

Say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).

When the system responds with “Nametag, please”, say “home”.

When the system responds with “About to store home. Does that sound OK?”, say “Yes” (or “No” to try again).

The system responds with “Storing home”.

-The system can store up to 20 nametags.

-Try to use multi-syllable nametags such as “my home”, and “the office”.

-Try to avoid similar-sounding nametags like “Tim” and “Kim”.

When using the “Dial” and “Store” commands, the system will recognize 7, 10, and 11-digit phone numbers. When dialing or storing a phone number, you can say “zero” or “oh” for 0.

3

349

3-7. Other interior features l

How to place a call using a stored nametag

STEP 1

STEP 2

Press the button. When the system responds with “Lexus

Link ready”, say “Call”.

When the system responds with “Nametag, please”, say the stored nametag.

STEP 3

The system responds with “Calling [nametag]”.

l

How to hear a list of your stored nametags

Press the button. When the system responds with “Lexus

STEP 1

Link ready”, say “Directory”.

STEP 2

The system will list your nametags.

Dialing the last number you called (“Redial”)

You can dial the last number you called by using the “Redial” feature.

STEP 1

Press the button. When the system responds with “Lexus

Link ready”, say “Redial”.

The system will respond with “Redialing [#]”.

STEP 2

Dialing a number a Lexus Link Advisor downloaded to your vehicle

Press the button. When the system responds with “Lexus

STEP 1

Link ready”, say “Number recall”.

The system will respond with “Connecting to number recall”.

STEP 2 n

Receiving a call

When someone calls you, you will hear a ring tone. Press the button to answer the call.

If you do not answer within 30 seconds, the system will terminate the incoming call.

350

3-7. Other interior features n

Ending a call

When your call is finished, press the button to end the call.

n

Accessing voicemail and sending number tones to an automated phone system

You can access a voicemail system and respond to a number request from an automated phone system. When you receive the request for a number while in a call, press the button after saying the numbers one at a time, say “Dial”.

If you do not say any commands within 5 seconds after pressing the button, or if you press the button twice, the system cannot receive the number tones you are trying to send. Press the button to try again.

n

How to retrieve your phone number

STEP 1

Press the button. When the system responds with “Lexus

Link ready”, say “My number”.

The system responds with “Your number is [#]”.

STEP 2

If the response is “Personal calling unavailable”, this means your personal calling feature is not yet active, this may take a few days from vehicle delivery. It could also mean that the personal calling service is not available in your area. Press the button to check with an Advisor. Now that you have your number, take a moment to practice by making your first call to your home phone. Remember, the system recognizes numbers better when you say them quickly.

3

351

3-7. Other interior features n

Verifying remaining units (minutes)

To verify remaining minutes

STEP 1

Press the button. When the system responds with “Lexus

Link ready”, say “Units”.

When the system responds with “Verify or add”, say “Verify”.

STEP 2

The system responds with “You have [#] units remaining”.

STEP 3

To add more calling units (minutes)

STEP 1

Press the button. When the system responds with “Lexus

Link ready”, say “Units”.

STEP 2

STEP 3

When the system responds with “Verify or add”, say “Add”.

The system responds with “Connecting to the Personal Calling

Center”.

n

Security code/locking your system

The personal calling function can be locked using a 4-digit security code.

While the system is locked, it is only possible to communicate with the

Lexus Link Call Center.

To turn on/off the security

button. When the system responds with “Lexus

STEP 1

Press the

Link ready”, say “Security”.

STEP 2

STEP 3

When the system responds with “Enter first digit of code please”, say your 4-digit code one digit at a time.

After the fourth digit, the system responds with “Security (code

####) is now on/off”.

352

3-7. Other interior features n

Speech recognition information

The Lexus Link speech recognition systems use speech technology that is designed to understand a wide range of speakers of American English. However, the technology may not work as well if a regional or ethnic accent is encountered. If the speech recognition system does not work properly, refer to the following.

l

The system does not recognize your command properly if noise is preset. Perform the following to improve voice command recognition.

• Turn down or off the air conditioning system.

• Slow down to reduce wind noise.

• Close the windows and the moon roof to block outside noise.

l

• Have all occupants be quiet so that the system does not recognize their conversation as a command.

When to speak

Say a command within 5 seconds after the system prompts you to speak.

l

How to speak

• Speak forcefully and clearly.

• Speak calmly and naturally.

• The driver should speak while facing forward, and the passenger should l speak facing the inside rear view mirror.

• Avoid speaking with a rising intonation. Use a flat or falling intonation.

Tips for one-word commands

• The system recognizes only one word at a time for personal calling. (There are some exceptions, such as “Advanced services” and “My number”.)

• When inputting the security codes or voice-activated keypad number, you must say them one digit at a time. When inputting a phone number, the speech recognition system can recognize 7, 10, and 11-digit numbers as well as the number 911.

3

353

3-7. Other interior features

354 l

Tips for entering a phone number using the “Dial” and “Store” commands

• You do not need to say “Dial”, “Store” or “Verify” after the phone number.

• If the phone number entered is not 7, 10, or 11 digits, use the “Dial” or “Store” command.

• Do not pause between the digits.

• Speech recognition does not recognize the words “Hundred” or “Thousand”.

Instead, say each digit.

• Speech recognition often works better when the digits are combined smoothly into a single phrase.

• If the system does not recognize your command properly, use the “Digit dial” command to enter one digit at a time.

l

If problems continue

• Say each one of the syllables in the word clearly.

• Be sure to articulate each sound in the word.

• If the system is confusing 2 commands that are similar, be sure to pronounce the distinction.

• Avoid clipping short words and syllables.

• Try speaking louder to prevent background noise from drowning out your voice.

l

Audible voice prompts

Some of the voice guidance instructions can be changed to Spanish. Press the

button and ask a Lexus Link Advisor.

n

Information on Advanced Services

See the Lexus Link area of the Lexus website at www.lexus.com/lexuslink/ or call the Lexus Link Call Center at 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) (toll-free) for more information.

n

Certification for the Lexus Link System

FCC ID: SCWTR-423-A2

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

3-7. Other interior features

CAUTION n

FCC WARNING

Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Radio Frequency Exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application only and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure regulations, must be used with a distance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm) between the antenna and the body of any person at all time during use.

n

Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

Persons using medical devices such as a pacemaker should not touch or come in close contact with the antenna while the vehicle ignition is on. Otherwise, the cellular signals may cause a malfunction in the medical devices.

3

355

3-7. Other interior features

356

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

358

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.

l

Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

l

For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thoroughly with water.

l

Wipe away any water.

l

If water no longer beads on clean paint, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

l

Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

n l

Automatic car washes

Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.

l l

Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface and harm your vehicle’s paint.

Rain-sensing windshield wipers (if equipped): Turn the wipers off before washing the vehicle. (

→P. 122) n

High pressure automatic car washes

Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity of the windows. Before entering an automatic car wash, check that the fuel filler door is closed.

n

Aluminum wheels

Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

4-1. Maintenance and care n

Bumpers and side moldings

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

n

To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body l

Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface

• If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust, iron powder or chemical substances l

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzine and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

CAUTION n

Caution about the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

NOTICE n

To protect your vehicle’s painted surfaces

Do not use organic cleaners such as benzine or gasoline.

n

Cleaning the exterior lights l l

Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

Do not apply wax on the surface of the lights. Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

4

359

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition: n

Protecting the vehicle interior

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty surfaces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

n

Cleaning the leather areas l

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

l

Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

l

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

l

Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. Allow the leather to dry in shaded and ventilated area.

n

Synthetic leather areas l

Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.

l

Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a sponge or soft cloth.

l

Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

360

4-1. Maintenance and care n

Cleaning the inside of the rear window

Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires.

n

Caring for leather areas

Lexus recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

n

Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. The excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible.

n

Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

4

CAUTION n l

Water in the vehicle

Be careful not to splash or spill liquid on the floor.

l

Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(

→P. 60)

Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

361

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE n

Cleaning detergents

Do not use the following types of detergent, as they may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.

l

Non-seat portions: Organic substances such as benzine or gasoline, alkaline or acidic solutions, dye, or bleach.

l

Seats: Acidic solutions, such as thinner, benzine, or alcohol.

n

Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces.

l

Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

l

Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time. Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

l

Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

n

Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust.

n

Cleaning the inside of the rear window

Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

362

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform regular checks. Lexus recommends the following maintenance.

n

General maintenance

Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by yourself or by a Lexus dealer.

n

Scheduled maintenance

Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled

Maintenance”.

n

Do-it-yourself maintenance

You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.

Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect warranty coverage.

The use of Lexus Repair Manuals are recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s Guide”,

“Warranty and Services Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or

“Warranty Booklet”.

n

Repair and replacement

It is recommended that genuine Lexus parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Lexus parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Lexus dealer performs repairs, confirm the warranty coverage.

4

363

4-2. Maintenance n

Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Lexus dealer l l

Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.

Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it.

CAUTION n

Warning in handling of battery l

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

l

Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

l l

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (

→P. 386)

Used engine oil contains chemicals that have been shown to cause cancer in laboratory animals. Avoid prolonged and repeated contact. Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

364

4-2. Maintenance

General maintenance

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be performed at the intervals specified in the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner’s

Manual Supplement”. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

Engine compartment

Battery

Brake fluid

Engine coolant

Engine oil

Exhaust system

Items

Radiator/condenser/hoses

Washer fluid

Check points

• Maintenance-free (

→P. 386)

• At the correct level? (

→P. 385)

• At the correct level?

(

→P. 383)

• At the correct level?

(

→P. 378)

• No fumes or strange sounds?

• Not blocked with foreign matter?

(

→P. 384)

• At the correct level?

(

→P. 389)

4

365

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle interior

Items

Accelerator pedal

Automatic transmission

“Park” mechanism

Brake pedal

Brakes

Head restraints

Indicators/buzzers

Lights

Parking brake

Seat belts

Seats

Steering wheel

Check points

• Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)?

• Can the vehicle be hold securely on an incline with the shift lever in “P”?

• Moves smoothly?

• Does it have appropriate clearance and correct amount of free play?

• Pulls to one side when applied?

• Loss of brake effectiveness?

• Spongy feeling brake pedal?

• Pedal almost touches floor?

• Move smoothly and lock securely?

• Function properly?

• Do all the lights come on?

• Headlights aimed correctly? (

→P. 429)

• Moves smoothly?

• Can hold the vehicle securely on an incline?

• Does the seat belt system operate smoothly?

• Are the belts undamaged?

• Do the seat controls operate properly?

• Moves smoothly?

• Has correct free play?

• No strange noises?

366

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior

Items

Doors/trunk

Engine hood

Fluid leaks

Tire

Check points

• Operate smoothly?

• The lock system works properly?

• Is there any leakage after parking?

• Inflation pressure is correct?

• Tire surfaces not worn or damaged?

• Tires rotated according to the maintenance schedule?

• Wheel nuts are not loose?

CAUTION n

If the engine is running

Turn off the engine and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before performing maintenance checks.

4

367

4-2. Maintenance

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include

OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission control system.

n

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on

The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.

n

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test: l

When the battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased.

Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.

l

When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary malfunction and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

n

When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips

The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

n

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

Contact your Lexus dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

368

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure given in these sections.

Items

Battery condition

• Warm water

Parts and tools

• Baking soda

(

P. 386

) • Grease

• Conventional wrench

(for terminal clamp bolts)

Brake fluid level

Engine coolant level

(

→P. 385)

• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE

J1703 brake fluid

• Rag or paper towel

• Funnel (used only for adding brake fluid)

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

For the U.S.A.:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and (

→P. 383)

50% deionized water.

For Canada:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55% coolant and

45% deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for adding coolant)

4

369

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

370

Washer fluid

Items

(

→P. 389)

Parts and tools

Engine oil level (

→P. 378)

• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

• Rag or paper towel, funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

Fuses

Headlight aim

(

→P. 411)

• Fuse with same amperage rating as original

(

→P. 429) • Phillips-head screwdriver

Radiator and condenser (

→P. 384)

Tire inflation pressure (

→P. 400)

• Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air source

• Water washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)

• Funnel

CAUTION n

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury.

l

When working on the engine compartment:

Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

l l

Be careful not to touch the engine, inverter, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.

l

Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the battery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

l

Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION n

When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille

Be sure the engine switch is “OFF”.

With the engine switch in “IG-ON” mode, the electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high.

(

→P. 384) n

Safety glasses

Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes.

NOTICE n

If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air. Also a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compartment.

4

371

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

STEP 1

Pull the hood lock release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

STEP 2

Lift the hood catch and lift the hood.

CAUTION n

Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

372

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Positioning the jack

When raising your vehicle with the jack, position the jack correctly.

Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

Front

Rear

4

373

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION n

When raising your vehicle

Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury.

l l

Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported only by the jack.

Always use automotive jack stands or a solid, level, surface.

Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the jack.

l l

Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put the shift lever in “P”.

Make sure to set the jack properly at the jack point.

Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the jack.

l l

Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.

When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath the jack.

374

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine compartment

GS430

Engine oil filler cap

(

→P. 378)

Engine oil level dipstick

(

→P. 379)

Brake fluid reservoir

(

→P. 385)

Fuse box (

→P. 411)

Washer fluid tank

(

→P. 389)

Engine coolant reservoir

(

→P. 383)

Electric cooling fans

Condenser (

→P. 384)

Radiator (

→P. 384)

Fuse box

Battery

(

→P. 411)

(

→P. 386)

4

375

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

GS350

Engine oil level dipstick

(

→P. 378)

Engine oil filler cap

(

→P. 379)

Brake fluid reservoir

(

→P. 385)

Fuse box (

→P. 411)

Washer fluid tank

(

→P. 389)

Engine coolant reservoir

(

→P. 383)

Electric cooling fans

Condenser (

→P. 384)

Radiator

Fuse box

Battery

(

→P. 384)

(

→P. 411)

(

→P. 386)

376

Engine compartment cover n

Removing the cover

Front

Right-hand side

Left-hand side

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

377

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Installing the clips

Open

Insert

Press

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

n

Checking the engine oil

STEP 1

Park the vehicle on level ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

STEP 2

GS430

Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out.

GS350

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level.

378

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 6

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

Low

Full n

Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.

GS430 GS350

4

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

ILSAC multigrade engine oil Oil grade

Oil quantity

(Low

→ Full)

Items

1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 Imp. qt.)

Clean funnel

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Remove the oil filler cap.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise until you hear a click.

379

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Recommended viscosity

Outside temperature

SAE 5W-30 is the best choice for good fuel economy, and good starting in cold weather.

*: If SAE 5W-30 oil is not available,

SAE 10W-30 may be used.

However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next oil change.

n

How to read oil container labels

Some oil containers are labeled with ILSAC certification marks that help you to select the proper oil.

380

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Engine oil consumption l l

The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.

More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and frequent acceleration and deceleration.

l

A new engine consumes more oil.

l

When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accurately.

l

Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp.qt./600 miles (1.0 L per 1000 km). If the vehicle consumes more than this amount, contact your Lexus dealer.

n

Resetting the engine oil maintenance data (U.S.A. only)

Perform the following steps:

STEP 1

Press the “DISP” switch (

→P. 114) to change the multi-information display to blank.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

Turn the engine switch to “OFF” mode.

Turn the engine switch to “IG-ON” mode with the trip meter reset button held down.

Keep pressing the button for longer than 7 seconds after the engine switch is in “IG-ON” mode.

After the above operation, the message shown in the left will appear on the display.

The master warning light and tone will turn on. After 5 seconds, the system reset is completed.

4

381

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION n

Used engine oil l

Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

l

Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground.

Call your Lexus dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

l

Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE n

To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on regular basis.

n

When replacing the engine oil l l l

Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.

Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

l

Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly retightened.

382

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

FULL

LOW

If the level is on or below the

“LOW” line, add coolant up to the

“FULL” line.

n n

If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have your Lexus dealer pressure test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31

°F [-35°C])

Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44

°F [-42°C])

For more details about engine coolant, contact your Lexus dealer.

4

383

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION n

When the engine is hot

Do not remove the radiator cap.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.

NOTICE n

When adding the coolant

Coolant is neither plain water not straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and anti freeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

n

If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it damage to parts or paint.

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear any foreign objects.

If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.

CAUTION n

When the engine is hot

Do not remove the radiator cap. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing burns or other injuries.

384

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Brake fluid n

Checking fluid level

The brake fluid level should be between the “MAX” and “MIN” lines on the tank.

Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.

n

Adding fluid

Fluid type

Items

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid

Clean funnel n

Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air

Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking efficiency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

CAUTION n

When filling the reservoir

Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces.

If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

4

385

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

386

NOTICE n

If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

Battery

Check the battery as follows.

n

Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp n

Checking battery condition

Check the battery condition by the indicator color.

Blue: Good condition

White: Charging necessary.

Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.

Red: Not working properly, have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Before recharging l

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:

If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect the ground cable.

n l

Make sure the engine switch on the charger is off when connecting and disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

After recharging/reconnecting the battery

In some cases, the engine may not start. Follow one or both of the following procedures: l

After opening and closing the driver's door, wait 10 seconds then attempt to start the engine. (If the system does not start first time, repeat the procedure.) l

With the shift lever in “P” and the engine switch in the “OFF” mode, open and close any door, then attempt to start the engine.

If the system will not start even after multiple attempts at both methods, contact your Lexus dealer.

4

387

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

388

CAUTION n

Chemicals in the battery

A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near battery: l l l

Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

l

Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

l l

Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

Keep children away from the battery.

n

Where to safety charge the battery n

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

How to recharge the battery n l

Only perform a slow charge (5A or less). The battery may explode if charged at a quicker rate.

l

Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, seek medical attention immediately.

l

If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the clothing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

l

If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE n

When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

Washer fluid

If any washer does not work or the warning message appears on the multi-information display, the washer tank may be empty. Add washer fluid.

n

NOTICE

Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.

n

Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the washer fluid tank.

4

389

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance schedules and treadwear.

n

Checking tires

New tread

Treadwear indicator

Worn tread

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the “TWI” or

Δ” marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.

Check spare tire condition and inflation pressure if not rotated.

n

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order shown.

Front

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Lexus recommends that tire rotation is carried out at the same interval as tire inspection.

n

The tire pressure warning system

Your Lexus is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (

→P. 452, 456)

390

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID code registered by your Lexus dealer. (

→P. 393)

Initializing the tire pressure warning system n

The tire pressure warning system must be initialized in the following circumstances: l

When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.

l

When changing the tire size.

When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.

4

391

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

How to initialize the tire pressure warning system

STEP 1

Park the vehicle in safe place and turn the engine switch to “OFF” mode.

While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.

STEP 2

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. (

→P. 505)

Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will operate based on this pressure level.

STEP 3

Turn the engine switch to “IG-ON” mode.

STEP 4

Push and hold the tire pressure warning reset switch until the tire pressure warning light blinks slowly three times and the message “PRESSURE INITIAL” appears on the multi-information display.

STEP 5

Wait for a few minutes with the “IG-ON” mode, and then turn engine switch to the “OFF” mode.

392

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Registering and selecting ID codes n

Registering ID codes

2 sets of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes can be registered. Once a second set of tires is registered at “2nd”, you can switch between tire set settings simply by pressing the tire pressure warning select switch.

There are 2 settings:

“MAIN” position: The ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter on the tires originally installed on the vehicle is registered.

“2nd” position: The ID code is not registered. When you replace a new set of tires, purchase tire pressure warning valves and transmitters from your Lexus dealer and have the new ID code registered by your

Lexus dealer.

n

Selecting ID codes

When replacing tires, make sure to select the ID code set that matches the new tire set. If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to wrong tire setting, the tire pressure warning system will not operate properly. After about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.

4

“MAIN”

“2nd”

393

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if: l

You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage l

A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus dealer.

n

Replacing tires and wheels

If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.

n

Tire life n

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.

n

Low profile tires (245/40R18, P245/40R18 and 245/40ZR18 tires)

Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip performance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or snow chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.

394

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Maximum load of tire

Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross

Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

As for the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle Weight

Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label. (

P. 400, 511).

n

Tire types

1 Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2 All season tires

All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

3 Snow tires

For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires.

If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, construction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction.

Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (

→P. 172) n

Initializing the tire pressure warning system

Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified level.

4

395

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally n

If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level and initialize the system again.

When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has failed l

Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the following cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pressure warning light does not flash 3 times and the setting message does not appear on the multi-information display.

l

After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warning light blinks for 1 minute after driving for 20 minutes.

n

Routine tire inflation pressure checks

The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

396

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Tire pressure warning system certification

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.

NOTE:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

l

NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

l

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

l

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

l

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE:

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

4

397

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION n

When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to fatal or injury accidents.

l l l

Do not mix tires of different makes, models, tread patterns or treadwear.

Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Lexus.

Do not mix radial, bias-belted, or bias-ply tires.

l

Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.

n

When initializing the tire pressure warning system

Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pressure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

NOTICE n

Repairing or replacing tires, wheels and tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

n

To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tire.

398

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE n

Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or potholes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

n

Low profile tires (245/40R18, P245/40R18 and 245/40ZR18 tires)

Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the following: l l

Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated, they may be damaged more severely.

Avoid hot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire and wheel damage.

n

If tire inflation pressures become low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

4

399

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire inflation pressure

n

Tire inflation pressure

The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is displayed on the tire and loading information label. (

→P. 505)

400

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Inspection and adjustment procedure

Tire valve

Tire pressure gauge

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

Remove the tire valve cap.

Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.

Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.

If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust tire pressure.

If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower.

After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage.

Reinstall the tire valve cap.

4

.

n

Tire inflation pressure check interval

You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.

If equipped, do not forget to check the spare.

401

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: l

Reduced fuel efficiency l

Reduced driving comfort and tire life l

Reduced safety l

Damage to the drive train n

If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.

Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: l

Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

l

Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and handling.

l

Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

l

Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

402

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION n

Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.

l

Excessive wear l l l

Uneven wear

Poor handling

Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires l

Poor sealing of the tire bead l l

Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards n

NOTICE

When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.

Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost, replace them as soon as possible.

4

403

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.

Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control.

n

Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Replacement wheels are available at your Lexus dealer.

Lexus does not recommend using:

• Wheels of different sizes or types

• Used wheels

• Bent wheels that have been straightened n

Aluminum wheel precautions l

Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use with your aluminum wheels.

l

When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

l

Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

l

Use only Lexus genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

n

When replacing wheels

The wheels of your Lexus are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be switched over from the old wheels. (

→P. 391)

404

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION n

When replacing wheels l

Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the

Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.

l

Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.

Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or serious injury.

NOTICE n

Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters l

Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Lexus dealer. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Lexus dealer.

l

Ensure that only genuine Lexus wheels are used on your vehicle.

Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with nongenuine wheels.

4

405

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

n

Removal method

Set the air conditioning system to recirculated mode.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

The air conditioning filter case cannot be removed with the system in the outside air mode.

Turn the engine switch to “OFF” mode.

Open the glove box and remove the partition.

STEP 4

STEP 5

Remove the filter cover.

Push the tabs and remove the filter case.

406

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Cleaning method n

Replacement method

If the filter is dirty, clean by blowing compressed air through the filter from the downward side.

Hold the air gun 2 in. (5cm) from the filter and blow for approximately 2 minutes at 72 psi (500 kPa, 5.0 kgf/cm

2

or bar).

If it is not available, have the filter cleaned by your Lexus dealer.

Remove the air conditioning filter from the filter case and replace it with a new one.

The

↑UP” marks shown on the filter and the filter case should be pointing up.

4

407

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Checking interval

Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Warranty and Services Guide/Owner's Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.) n

If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE n l

To prevent damage to the system

When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always installed.

l

When cleaning the filter, do not clean the with water.

408

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.

n

You will need the following items: l

Flathead screwdriver l

Small Phillips-head screwdriver l

Lithium battery (CR1632) n

Replacing the battery

Take out the mechanical key.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Remove the cover.

Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the “+” terminal facing up.

4

409

410

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

If the electronic key battery is discharged

The following symptoms may occur.

l

The smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control will not function properly.

l

The operational range is reduced.

n l l

Use a CR1632 lithium battery

Batteries can be purchased at your Lexus dealer, jewelers, or camera stores.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by a Lexus dealer.

l

Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

CAUTION n

Removed battery and other parts

Keep away from children.

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking.

n

NOTICE

For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

l l

Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

Do not touch or move any other components inside the electronic key.

l

Do not bend the battery terminals.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown.

If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

STEP 1

Turn the engine switch to “OFF” mode.

Remove the engine compartment cover if necessary.

STEP 2

→P. 377

STEP 3

Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment (type A)

Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

Engine compartment (Type B)

Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

4

411

412

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Driver's side instrument panel

Remove the lid.

Passenger's side instrument panel

Remove the lid.

Luggage compartment

Remove the cover.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Luggage compartment (vehicles with active stabilizer suspension system)

Remove the lid.

STEP 4

STEP 5

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage ratings”

(

→P. 416) for details about which fuse to check.

Remove the fuse with the pullout tool.

4

413

414

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 6

Check if the fuse has blown.

Type A

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type B

Type C

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact your Lexus dealer.

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Type D

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact your Lexus dealer.

Removing the front controller (engine compartment: type B)

Lift the lid off while pushing the tabs on either side.

4

415

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

416

Fuse layout and amperage ratings n

Engine compartment (Type A)

1

Fuse

ECU-B

4

5

2

3

6

7

ABS MAIN3

TURN-HAZ

IG2 MAIN

RND NO.2

D/C CUT

RND NO.1

8

MPX-B

Ampere

10

10

15

20

30

20

30

10

Circuit

VGRS, EPS, Driver’s seat switch module, Lexus Link System ECU

ECB system

Turn signal lights, Emergency flashers

IG2, GAUGE and IGN

Audio system

DOME and MPX-B

Audio system

Multiplex communication system,

Front controller, Door control system

(Power door lock system, Door courtesy lights, Power windows, Power rear view mirror control system, Outside rear view mirror heaters), Power seat system, Steering sensors, ECB system, Power tilt and telescopic steering wheel, Gauges and meters,

Combination switch

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

9

DOME

21

P/I-B

22

EPS

23

ALT

Fuse

10

11

12

13

14

CDS

ABS MAIN2

ABS MOTOR

ABS MAIN1

E/G-B

15

ABS1

18

19

16

17

RH J/B-B

VGRS

MAIN

STARTER

20

LH J/B-B

10

10

30

10

60

Ampere

10

Circuit

Foot lights, Vanity lights, Gauges and meters, Steering spot light, Steering switch illumination, Rear personal lights, Automatic transmission selector lever spot light, Front personal lights

NOIS FILTER

50

ECB system

ABS

Capacitor

FR CTRL BATT, ECTS and ALT-S

VSC system, ABS MAIN1, ABS

MAIN2 and ABS MTR

AM2, DOOR FR, and DOOR RR

30

40

30

30

VGRS

H-LP R LWR and H-LP L LWR

30

60

Starting system

FL DOOR, RL DOOR and RND

NO.3

Multi-port fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

EPS

80

150

RH J/B-AM, LH J/B-AM, E/G-AM,

RR JB, HEATER, DEFOG, FAN1,

FAN2, ABS2, ABS MOTOR,

ABS MAIN1, and ABS MAIN2

4

417

418

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

24

RR J/B

25

GLW PLG1

26

RH J/B-AM

27

28

29

30

31

32

ABS2

DEFOG

CDS

FAN1

HEATER

GLW PLG2

33

E/G-AM

34

LH J/B-AM

35

FAN2

30

50

40

40

50

50

60

Ampere

80

50

80

80

60

Circuit

STOP LP R, STOP LP L, RR-B,

RR TAIL, RR FOG, RR-IG1, PSB, and RR S/SHADE

Glow plug heater

AM1, OBD, STOP SW, TI&TE,

PWR OUTLET, FR P/SEAT RH,

STR LOCK, ECU-IG RH, RH-IG,

ACC, CIG, SECURITY,

FR S/HER RH and AIR SUS

VSC, ABS

Rear window defogger, Noise filter

F: CDS

Electric cooling fans

Air conditioning system

Glow plug heater

H-LMP CLN, FR CTRL-AM and

A/C COMP

S/ROOF, FR P/SEAT LH, TV,

FR S/HTR LH, FR WIP, H-LP LVL,

LH-IG, FUEL OPEN, A/C, PANEL and LH-B

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Engine compartment (Type B)

1

2

10

11

4

5

6

7

8

3

9

6: only for GS430 equipped with active stabilizer suspension system

Fuse

FR CTRL-B

A/F

ETCS

ALT-S

H-LP CLN

STB-AM

A/C COMP

DEICER

FR CTRL-AM

IG2

EFI NO.2

7.5

30

30

7.5

25

Ampere

25

Circuit

Headlight high beam, horn

15

10

30

10

10

Exhaust system

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

Charging system

Headlight cleaner

DC/DC converter

Air conditioning system

Front fog lights, parking lights, windshield washer

Ignition system

Fuel system, exhaust system

4

419

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

12

13

14

Fuse

H-LP R LWR

H-LP L LWR

F/PMP

15

EFI

16

INJ

17

18

19

20

21

H-LP UPR

HORN

WASHER

FR TAIL

FR FOG

15

10

20

10

15

Ampere

15

15

25

20

(GS430)

25

(GS350)

Circuit

Headlight low beam (right)

Headlight low beam (left)

Fuel system

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

20

Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

Headlight high beams

Horns

Windshield washer

Parking lights

Front fog lights

420

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Driver’s side instrument panel

1

2

Fuse

FR P/SEAT LH

A/C

3

TV

4

5

6

TRK OPN

LH-B

S/ROOF

7

PANEL

8

FUEL OPEN

Ampere

30

7.5

Circuit

Power seat system

Air conditioning system

7.5

Audio system, Air conditioning system, Rear view monitor system

Trunk lid opener 10

10

25

7.5

10

Theft deterrent system

Moon roof

Steering switch illumination, Audio system, Glove box light, Automatic transmission selector lever illumination, Console box light, Adaptive variable suspension switch illumination, Cigarette lighter illumination,

Air conditioning system, VSC off switch illumination, Driving pattern selector switch, Seat heater or

Heated and ventilated seat switches,

Register ILL RH, Register ILL LH,

Register ILL CTR

Fuel filler door opener, Trunk lid opener

421

4

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

9

ECU-IG LH

10

FR S/HTR LH

11

RR DOOR LH

12

FR DOOR LH

13

RAD NO.3

14

H-LP LVL

15

LH-IG

Ampere

10

15

20

20

10

7.5

10

30

Circuit

VSC system, ECB system, Yaw rate and G sensor, Steering sensor,

Cruise control system, Dynamic radar cruise control system, EPS system, VGRS system, Rear view monitor system, Four-wheel drive system,

Front controller, Moon roof, Rain sensor

Seat heater or Heated and ventilated seats

Rear left door control system (Power door lock system, Door courtesy light, Power window)

Front left door control system (Power door lock system, Power rear view mirror control system, Door courtesy light, Outside rear view mirror heater,

Power window)

Audio system

AFS, Automatic headlight leveling control system

Charging system, Headlight cleaners, Exhaust gas sensor, Rear window defogger, Electric cooling fans, Rear left door control system, Front left door control system, Emergency flashers, Automatic transmission,

Seat belt pretensioners, Intuitive parking assist

Windshield wipers and washer

422

16

FR WIP

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Passenger’s side instrument panel

1

2

Fuse

FR P/SEAT RH

OBD

3

STOP SW

4

AM1

5

TI&IE

6

7

8

SECURITY

STR LOCK

GAUGE

9

IGN

Ampere

30

7.5

Circuit

Power seat system

On-board diagnosis system

7.5

7.5

20

7.5

25

7.5

10

Stop/tail lights, Multi-port fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, Starting system,

ECB system, VSC system, Shift lock system

Power tilt and telescopic steering wheel, Multiplex communication system

Smart access system with push-button start

Steering lock system

Gauges and meters

Multi-port fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system, SRS airbag system, Stop/tail lights, Steering lock system, ECB system, Lexus Link System ECU, Occupant classification system ECU

423

4

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

10

ACC

11

12

13

CIG

PWR OUTLET

AIR SUS

14

RR DOOR RH

15

FR DOOR RH

16

AM2

17

RH-IG

18

FR S/HTR RH

Ampere

7.5

15

15

20

20

20

15

7.5

15

Circuit

Multiplex communication system,

Smart access system with push-button start, Rear view monitor system,

Audio system, Air conditioning system, Lexus Link System ECU

Cigarette lighter

Power outlet

Adaptive variable suspension system

Rear right door control system

(Power door lock system, Door courtesy light, Power window)

Front right door control system

(Power door lock system, Power rear view mirror control system, Door courtesy light, Outside rear view mirror heater, Power window), Multiplex communication system

Starting system

Seat heater switches, Front right door control system, Rear right door control system, Capacitor, Combination switch, Seat belt pretensioners, Intuitive parking assist

Seat heaters and ventilators

424

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse

19

ECU-IG RH

Ampere

10

Circuit

Electric tilt and telescopic steering,

Multiplex communication system,

Smart access system with push-button start, Audio system, Air conditioning system, Shift lock system, Tire pressure warning system, Combination switch, Front stabilizer, Rear stabilizer, DC/DC converter

4

425

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Luggage compartment

1

2

3

4

Fuse

RR S/SHADE

PSB

RR-IG2

RR-IG1

7

8

5

6

9

RR-B

RR FOG

STOP LP L

STOP LP R

RR TAIL

Ampere

7.5

30

10

10

10

7.5

10

10

10

Rear sunshade

Circuit

Pre-collision seat belt

Pre-collision seat belt, seat belt pretensioners

Trunk light

Stoplights, back-up light

High mounted stoplights

Tail lights, license plate lights

426

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Luggage compartment

(vehicles with active stabilizer suspension system)

1

2

3

Fuse

STB FR

STB RR

STB DC/DC

Ampere

Front stabilizer

Circuit

50

30

30

Rear stabilizer

DC/DC converter n

After a fuse is replaced l

If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb may need replacement. (

→P. 431) n l

If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

If there is an overload in the circuits

The fuses are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is damaged.

4

427

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION n

To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.

l l

Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any other object in place of a fuse.

Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

This can cause extensive damage or even fire.

l

Do not modify fuses or the fuse box.

NOTICE n

Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer.

428

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Headlight aim

n

Gauges

High beam vertical position

Low beam vertical position

High beam horizontal position

Low beam horizontal position n

Adjustment bolts

High beam horizontal adjustment

High beam vertical adjustment

Low beam adjustment bolt A

Low beam adjustment bolt B n

Before checking the headlight aim

Make sure the vehicle has a full tank of gas and the area around

STEP 1 the headlight is not deformed.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Sit in the driver’s seat.

Bounce the vehicle several times.

STEP 4

4

429

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Adjusting the headlight aim

Low beam (vertical adjustment)

STEP 1

Using a Phillips-head screwdriver, turn adjustment bolt A so that the bubble is within the 2 center lines.

Remember the turning direction and the number of turns.

STEP 2

Turn bolt B the same number of turns and in the same direction as step 1.

Low beam (horizontal adjustment)

Turn adjustment bolt A so that the red line on the gauge is in the middle of the “0” mark (within the blue lines to either side of the gauge).

High beam (vertical and horizontal adjustment)

Turn each adjustment bolt in either direction so that the bubble in within the 2 center lines (vertical), and the red line on the gauge is in the middle of the “0” mark (within the blue lines to either side of the gauge) (horizontal).

If you feel that there is a large deviation, have the headlight aim adjusted at a Lexus dealer.

430

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs yourself. For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your Lexus dealer.

n

Prepare a replacement light bulb.

Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (

→P. 507) n

Remove the engine compartment cover if necessary.

→P. 377 n

Front bulb locations n

Rear bulb locations

Rear turn signal light

Parking light

Headlight high beam

Back-up light

4

431

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Replacing light bulbs n

Headlight high beam

STEP 1

STEP 2

Unplug the connector while pushing the lock release.

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise to remove it.

432

n

Parking light

STEP 1

STEP 2 n

Back-up light

STEP 1

STEP 2

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

Open the trunk lid. Remove the trunk handle and panel cover clips.

4

Partly remove the trunk panel cover and turn bulb bases counterclockwise.

433

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

STEP 3 n

Rear turn signal light

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Remove the light bulb.

Open the trunk lid and remove the cover.

Turn the bulb base counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

434

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance n

Bulbs other than the above

If any of the bulbs listed below has burnt out, have your Lexus dealer replace it.

l

Headlight low beams (high-intensity discharge bulbs) l

Fog lights l

Front turn signal lights l

Front side marker lights l

Stop/tail lights l

Tail lights l

Rear side marker lights l

High mounted stoplight l

License plate lights

4 n

Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Contact your Lexus dealer for more information in the following situations. Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does not indicate a malfunction.

l

Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.

n l

Water has built up inside the headlight.

LED light bulbs

The tail, tail/stop and high mounted stoplights consist of a number of LEDs. If any

LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer to have the light replaced.

If two or more LEDs in a stoplight burn out, your vehicle may not conform to local laws (SAE).

n

High-intensity discharge (HID) headlights

If voltage to the high-intensity discharge bulbs is insufficient, the light may not come on, or may go out temporarily. The high-intensity discharge bulbs will come on when normal power is restored.

435

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

CAUTION n

Replacing light bulbs l

Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after turning off the headlights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

l

Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the bulb by the plastic or metal portion.

If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.

l l

Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

Do not attempt to repair or disassemble light bulbs, connectors, electric circuits or component parts.

Doing so may result in serious injury due to electric shock.

n l

High-intensity discharge (HID) headlights

Contact your Lexus dealer before replacing high-intensity discharge headlights

(including light bulbs).

l

Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight's high voltage socket when the headlights are turned on. An extremely high voltage of 20000V will be discharged and could result in serious injury or death by electric shock.

n

To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

436

5-1. Essential information

If your vehicle needs to be towed

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your

Lexus dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/provincial and local laws.

The wheels and axle on the ground must be in good condition.

If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Lexus dealer before towing.

l

The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.

l

The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only attempted on hard, surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

438

5-1. Essential information

Towing eyelet n

Emergency towing procedure

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Release the parking brake.

Put the shift lever in “N”.

The engine switch must be in the “ACC” mode (engine off) or the “IG-

ON” mode (engine on).

n

CAUTION

Caution while towing l l

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cable or chain.

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

5 n

NOTICE

To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.

This may cause serious damage to the transmission.

439

5-1. Essential information

Installing towing eyelet

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3 n

Location of the emergency towing eyelet

→P. 473

Remove the eyelet cover using a flathead screwdriver.

To protect the bodywork, place a rag between the screwdriver and the vehicle body, as shown in the illustration.

Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.

Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench.

440

5-1. Essential information

CAUTION n

Installing towing eyelet to the vehicle

Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely.

If not securely installed, towing eyelet may come loose during towing. This may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.

Towing with a sling-type truck

NOTICE n

To prevent body damage

Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front or rear.

5

441

5-1. Essential information

Towing with a wheel lift-type truck

From front

Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

NOTICE n

To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.

442

5-1. Essential information

From rear (2WD models)

Switch to “ACC” mode so that the steering wheel is unlocked.

From rear (4WD models)

Use a towing dolly under the front wheel.

NOTICE n

To prevent damaging the vehicle l

Do not tow the vehicle with the engine switch “OFF”.

The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel straight.

l

When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

5

443

5-1. Essential information

Using a flat bed truck

If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed truck, it should be tied down at the locations shown in the illustration.

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45°.

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

444

5-1. Essential information

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

n

Visible symptoms l

Fluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.) l

Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear l

Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal n

Audible symptoms l

Changes in exhaust sound l

Excessive tire squeal when cornering l

Strange noises related to the suspension system l

Pinging or other noises related to the engine n

Operational symptoms l

Engine missing, stumbling or running rough l

Appreciable loss of power l

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking l

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road l

Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

5

445

5-1. Essential information

Fuel pump shut off system

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine.

n

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.

STEP 1

Switch to “ACC” mode or “OFF”.

Restart the engine.

STEP 2

NOTICE n

Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

446

5-1. Essential information

Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance.

Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to record data in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an Event Data

Recorder (EDR).

In a crash or a near car crash event

The EDR may record some or all of the following information.

l

Engine speed l

Whether the brake pedal was applied or not l

Vehicle speed l

To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed l

Position of the transmission shift lever l

Whether the driver and front passenger wore seat belts or not l

Driver's seat position l

SRS airbag deployment data l

SRS airbag system diagnostic data

Your Lexus’ Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may contain another EDR.

There are a variety of driving situations which include activating the vehicle stability control (VSC) under which the VSC EDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR may record some or all of the following information: l

Behavior of the vehicle l

Steering wheel angle l

Vehicle speed

5

447

5-1. Essential information l

To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed l

To what extent the brake pedal was applied l

To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of the 4 wheels l

Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for the purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as conversation between passengers.

Disclosure of the data

Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: l

An agreement from the vehicle's owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained l

Officially requested by the police or other authorities l

Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit l

Ordered by a court

However, if necessary Lexus will: l

Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety performance l

Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only when it is deemed necessary l

Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non-Lexus organization for research purposes

448

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake system.

Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

*

• Low brake fluid

• Malfunction in the brake system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released, the system is operating normally.

*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

→P. 463

5

449

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Warning light Warning light/Details

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator lamp

Malfunction in:

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system; or

• The transmission control system.

SRS warning light

Malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system;

• Front passenger occupant classification system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system.

450

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Warning light/Details

ABS warning light

Malfunction in:

• The ABS; or

• The brake assist system.

ECB

* 1

/VSC warning light

Malfunction in:

• The electronically controlled brake system; or

• The VSC.

Electric power steering system warning light

Malfunction in the EPS.

Pre-collision system warning light (if equipped)

Malfunction in the pre-collision system.

*

1

: Electronically Controlled Brake System

Have the malfunction repaired immediately.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.

5

Warning light Correction procedure Warning light/Details

Open door warning light

(warning buzzer)

*

2

A door or the trunk is not fully closed.

Low fuel level warning light

Remaining fuel

(Approximately 2.6 gal. [10

L, 2.2 Imp.gal.] or less)

Check that all doors and the trunk are closed.

Refuel the vehicle.

451

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning light Correction procedure Warning light/Details

Driver’s seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)

*

3

Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt.

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

(warning buzzer)

* 3

Warns the front passenger to fasten his/her seat belt.

Tire pressure warning light

When the light comes on:

Low tire inflation pressure.

When the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute:

Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system.

Master warning light

A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.

Fasten the seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

Adjust the tire inflation pressure.

Have the system checked by your Lexus dealer.

Take appropriate action in accordance with the message displayed on the multi-information display.

*

2

:Open door warning buzzer:

→P. 462

*

3

:Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt reminder buzzer:

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert the driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at lest 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

452

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency n

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

First check the following: l

Is your vehicle low on gas?

If it is, refuel the vehicle immediately.

l

Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely.

The light will go off after taking several driving trips.

If the light does not go off even after several trips, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

n

SRS warning light

This warning light system monitors the following: l

The airbag sensor assembly l

Front airbag sensors l l

The curtain shield airbag sensors

The side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies l

The driver’s seat position sensor l

Driver’s seat belt buckle switch l

The front passenger occupant classification ECU l

The pressure sensor l

The belt tension sensor l l

AIRBAG ON and AIRBAG OFF indicator lights

Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch l

The inflators n l l

The warning light

The interconnecting wiring and power sources

Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder

If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

5

453

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency n

When the tire pressure warning light comes on

Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level. Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire pressure warning light.

n

The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes

The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light.

CAUTION n

If the tire pressure warning light comes on

Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.

l

Vehicles with run-flat tires:

• Decelerate to the lowest appropriate speed as soon as possible. Do not drive over 55 mph (90 km/h).

• Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.

• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Have the tire replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer.

• Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

l

Vehicles with standard tires:

• Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire inflation pressure immediately.

• If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pressure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest

Lexus dealer.

• Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

n

If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur

The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

454

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning message is displayed

If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:

Multi-information display

Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is currently being displayed on the multi-information display.

If any of the warning light turns on again after performing the following actions, contact your Lexus dealer.

5

455

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.

A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. The following warnings indicate the possibility of damage to the vehicle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.

Warning message

(Flashing)

Details

Abnormal engine oil pressure.

The warning light may turn on if the engine oil pressure is too low.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Warning message Details

(4WD models)

Malfunction in the 4WD system.

Malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system.

456

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message Details

Malfunction in the rear lights system.

Malfunction in the tire pressure warning system.

The tire pressure warning light will blink for 1 minute and then stay on.

Malfunction in the steering lock system.

(Flashing)

(GS430, if equipped)

Malfunction in the active stabilizer suspension system.

5

457

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Malfunction in the PCS.

Details

(If equipped)

(If equipped)

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

Intuitive parking assist malfunction.

The malfunctioning sensor is shown flashing on the display. (The illustration shows malfunctioning left front sensor.)

Malfunction in the radar cruise control system.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Switch the engine switch to “OFF” and then to “IG-ON” mode again to reset the cruise control system.

458

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency n

If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative l

The system will be disabled in the following conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)

If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are used.

l

If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.

l

If the tire inflation pressure is more than 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm

The system may be disabled in the following conditions:

2

or bar).

(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) l l

If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies are nearby.

If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.

l

If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.

l l

If the tire pressure warning select switch is set to a different tire setting.

If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the wheels or wheel housings.

l

If non-genuine Lexus wheels are used.

n l

If tire chains are used.

If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently

If the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute frequently when the engine switch is turned to “IG-ON” mode, have it checked by your Lexus dealer.

NOTICE n

Precaution when installing a different tire

When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

5

459

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warning may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

Warning message Details

(GS430)

(GS350)

Malfunction in the TRAC, VSC or hill-start assist control system.

In some cases, only “CHECK VSC” or “CHECK

ECB

*

” is displayed.

(GS430)

(GS350)

(U.S.A)

(Canada)

Malfunction in the ABS or BA.

In some cases, only “CHECK VSC” or “CHECK

ECB

*

” is displayed.

460

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

Malfunction in the VGRS.

Details

(GS430)

(Steering guide symbol and arrows are flashing)

(GS430)

The steering sensor cable is broken and signals cannot be received.

*: Electronically Controlled Brake System

5

461

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the malfunction repaired immediately.

A buzzer sounds and a warning message is shown on the multi-information display. After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message turns off.

Warning message Correction procedure Details

One or more of the doors is not fully closed.

The system also indicates which doors are not fully closed.

flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that one or more of the doors is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

The hood is not fully closed.

flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that hood is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

Make sure that all of the doors are closed.

Close the hood.

462

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashing)

(Flashing)

Correction procedure Details

The trunk is not fully closed.

flashes and a buzzer sounds to indicate that trunk is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 3 mph [5 km/h]).

Close the trunk.

The moon roof is not fully closed (with the engine switch “OFF” and the driver’s door opened).

The parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed of more than 3 mph [5 km/h]).

Close the moon roof.

Release the parking brake.

5

The washer fluid level is low.

Add washer fluid.

The engine oil level is low.

Check the engine oil level, and add if necessary.

463

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(U.S.A. only)

(U.S.A. only)

Correction procedure Details

The engine oil is scheduled to be changed.

Comes on approximately

4500 miles (7200 km) after the engine oil is changed. (The indicator will not work properly unless the oil maintenance data has been reset).

The engine oil should be changed.

Comes on approximately

5000 miles (8000 km) after the engine oil is changed (and the oil maintenance data has been reset).

Check the engine oil, and change if necessary.

Check and change the engine oil.

Low tire inflation pressure.

Check the tire inflation pressure, and adjust to the appropriate level.

464

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

(If equipped)

(Flashing)

Details

The PCS is not currently functional.

Correction procedure

Clean the grille and the sensor.

This message appears when the pre-collision system is hot. In this case, wait until the system cools down.

Intuitive parking assist is dirty or covered with ice.

(The illustration shows something on the left front sensor.)

Clean the sensor.

The radar cruise control sensor is dirty or covered with ice.

Clean the sensor.

5

(If equipped)

(Flashing)

The radar cruise control system is unable to judge vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

• Switch the mode select to either the normal or power mode.

• If the windshield wipers are on, turn them off or set them to either the intermittent or the slow mode.

(If equipped)

465

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Warning message Details Correction procedure

Your vehicle is nearing the vehicle ahead (in radar cruise mode).

Slow the vehicle by applying the brakes.

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

(Flashing)

The transmission is out of

“P” when attempting to start the engine.

Shift the shift lever to “P” before pressing the engine switch.

n

After changing the engine oil (U.S.A. only) n

Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (

→P. 381)

Approach warning message

In the following instances, there is the possibility that the approach warning will not activate even when the vehicle-to-vehicle distance decreases.

l

When your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are traveling at the same speed or the vehicle ahead is traveling more quickly than your vehicle.

l

When the vehicle ahead is traveling at a very low speed.

l l

Immediately after cruise control speed is set.

At the instant the accelerator pedal is depressed.

466

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION n

Maintenance of the tires

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label).

(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light).

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

5

467

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Other messages

If the following message is displayed, take appropriate action and confirm that the message has disappeared.

Message Details

(Flashing)

(If equipped)

The driver’s door is opened when the transmission is out of “P” with the engine on.

Shift the shift lever to “P”.

Calibrate the neutral position of the steering wheel.

(

→P. 148)

468

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the malfunction repaired immediately.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning massage and light turn off.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Warning message Details

Correction procedure

Once

(Comes on for 8 seconds.)

(Flashing)

The electronic key is not detected when attempting to start the engine.

Confirm the location of the electronic key.

Once 3 times

(Flashing)

An open door other than the driver's door is closed while the electronic key is outside the detection range and the engine switch is in

“ACC” or “IG-

ON” mode.

Confirm the location of the electronic key.

5

469

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Once 3 times

Continuous

Continuous

Once

Warning message

(Flashing)

(Displayed alternately)

(Flashing)

Details

Correction procedure

An open door other than the driver's door is closed while the electronic key is outside the detection range and the engine switch is in

“ACC” or “IG-

ON” mode with the shift lever in

“P”.

An open door other than the driver's door is closed while the electronic key is outside the detection range and the engine switch is in

“ACC” or “IG-

ON” mode with the shift lever not in “P”.

Turn the engine switch

“OFF” or confirm the location of the electronic key.

• Shift the shift lever to “P”.

• Confirm the location of the electronic key.

The electronic key battery is low.

Replace the battery.

(

→P. 409)

(Flashing)

470

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer

Warning message

⎯ ⎯

⎯ ⎯

(Flashing)

Details

Correction procedure

An open door has been closed and the engine switch has been turned twice to the

“ACC” mode from

“OFF” mode.

Press the engine switch while applying the brakes.

The steering lock has not released within 3 seconds of pressing the engine switch.

The engine switch indicator will flash green for 15 seconds.

Press the engine switch again while turning the steering wheel with the brake pedal depressed.

5

471

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire (Vehicles with run-flat tires)

Take your vehicle to the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer as soon as possible.

n

Run-flat tires (A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall)

You can continue driving a vehicle with run-flat tires even if any tire goes flat.

It is able to run for a maximum of

100 miles (160 km) at a speed below 55 mph (90 km/h) after the tire pressure warning light comes on. (

→P. 452) n

In some condition (such as at high temperatures)

You can not continue driving for up to 100 miles (160 km).

n

If you cannot distinguish between the standard tires and run-flat tires n

Consult your Lexus dealer.

For the detailed information on run-flat tires

See the tire warranty book.

NOTICE n

When replacing the tires l

Have the tires replaced by the nearest Lexus dealer or authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be affected by the installation or removal of tires.

l

Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as well.

n

To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.

472

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire (Vehicles with standard tires)

Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.

n

Before jacking up the vehicle l

Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.

l

Set the parking brake.

l

Shift the shift lever to “P”.

l

Stop the engine.

l

Turn on the emergency flashers.

n

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Jack handle Tools

Towing eyelet

Jack

Tighten Loosen

5

Wheel nut wrench Spare tire

473

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency n

Compact spare tire

The compact tire saves space in your luggage compartment, and its lighter weight helps to enhance fuel economy and permits easier installation in case of a flat tire.

The compact spare tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

n

The compact spare tire l l

The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” on the tire sidewall.

Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.

Make sure to check the tire inflation pressure of the compact spare tire.

(

→P. 505) n

Tread life

The compact spare tire can be used many times, if necessary. It has tread life of up to 3000 miles (4800 km) depending on road conditions and your driving habits.

When treadwear indicators appear on the tire, replace the tire. (

→P. 390) n

When using the compact spare tire

As the spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

474

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the spare tire

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Lift up the hook of the panel on the trunk floor.

Secure the panel using the hook provided.

Loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.

5

475

476

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Replacing a flat tire

STEP 1

Chock the tires.

Front

Rear

STEP 2

Flat tire

Left-hand side

Right-hand side

Left-hand side

Right-hand side

Wheel chock positions

Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Behind the rear left-hand side tire

In front of the front right-hand side tire

In front of the front left-hand side tire

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Turn the tire jack portion “A” by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

5

477

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Installing the spare tire

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Remove any dirt or foreign matter from the wheel contact surface.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle.

Tapered portion

Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each nut by hand to approximately the same amount.

Disc wheel sheet

Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel sheet.

Lower the vehicle.

478

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 4

Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque:

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

STEP 5

Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.

n

If you have a flat rear tire on a road covered with snow or ice

Install the compact spare tire on the front of the vehicle. Perform the following steps and fit tire chains to the rear tires.

Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehicle.

Fit tire chains to the rear tires.

STEP 3 n

After completing the tire change

The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (

→P. 391)

5

479

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION n

Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.

l l

Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or installing and removing tire chains.

Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

l l l

Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.

Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.

When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

l

Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace the tire.

l l

Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.

l

Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

n

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle may be injured.

Replacing a flat tire

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury.

l

Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

The oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen, causing a serious accident.

Remove any oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

l

Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

Failure to follow these precautions could cause the nuts to loosen and the wheels may fall off, which could lead to an accident causing death or serious injury.

480

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION n

When using the spare tire l

Remember that your spare tire is specifically designed for use with your vehicle.

Do not use your spare tire on another vehicle.

l

Do not use two spare tires simultaneously.

n l l

Replace the spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possible.

Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp cornering.

Speed limit when using the compact spare tire

Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle.

The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident.

5

481

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE n

Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair.

n

Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle

The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

n

Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire

Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.

Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

n

When replacing the tires l

When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Lexus dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

n l

Replace the grommets for the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters as well.

To avoid damaging the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

Do not use liquid sealants on flat tires.

482

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the engine will not start

If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed (

P. 97), consider each of the following points.

n

The engine will not start even when the starter motor operates normally.

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

l

There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Add fuel to the vehicle.

l

The engine may be flooded.

Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures.(

→P. 97) l

There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.

(

→P. 52) n

The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

l

The battery may be discharged. (

→P. 488) l

The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

n

The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

l

One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

l

The battery may be discharged. (

→P. 488)

5

483

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Set the parking brake.

Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” mode.

Depress the brake pedal.

STEP 3

STEP 4

Pry the cover up with a flathead screwdriver or equivalent.

STEP 5

Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

484

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you lose your keys

New genuine Lexus keys can be made by your Lexus dealer using one of the other keys and the key number stamped on your key number plate.

5

485

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the electronic key does not operate properly

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is interrupted

(

P. 7) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart access system with push-button start and wireless remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below.

Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk and key linked functions

Doors

Using the mechanical key in order to perform the following operations:

Locks all doors

Closes the windows/moon roof

(turn and hold)

Unlocks the door

Turning the key rearward unlocks the driver's door. Turning the key once again unlocks the other doors.

Opens the windows/moon roof

(turn and hold)

Trunk

Turn the mechanical key clockwise to open.

486

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Changing engine switch modes and starting the engine

STEP 1

STEP 2

Put the shift lever in “P” and apply the brakes.

Touch the Lexus emblem side of the electronic key to the engine switch.

STEP 3

An alarm will sound to indicate that the start function cannot detect the electronic key that is touched to engine switch if any of the doors is opened and closed while the key is touched to the switch.

To change engine switch modes: Within 5 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and press the engine switch.

Modes can be changed each time the switch is pressed. (

P. 97)

To start the engine: Press the engine switch within 5 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keep the brake pedal depressed.

In the event that the engine still cannot be operated, contact your Lexus dealer.

n

Stopping the engine n

Shift the shift lever to P and press the engine switch as you normally do when stopping the engine

Replacing the key battery

As the above procedure is the temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (

→P.

409)

5

487

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehicle’s battery is discharged.

You can call your Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Lexus Customer

Service Assistance.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehicle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Lexus following the steps below.

STEP 1

GS350 only: Remove the engine compartment covers.

(

→P. 377)

STEP 2

GS430

Connecting the jumper cables.

GS350

488

If required, remove all vent plugs from the booster battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery. (This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and burns.)

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle.

Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle.

Negative (-) battery terminal or your vehicle.

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately five minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

Open and close any of the doors with the engine switch “OFF”.

Maintain the engine speed on the second vehicle and turn the engine switch to the “IG-ON” mode, then start the vehicle’s engine.

Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were connected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

n

Avoiding a discharged battery l

Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned off.

n l

Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is running at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.

When the battery is removed or discharged

The following systems must be initialized.

l l l

Power windows (

P. 43)

Variable gear ratio steering (

P. 159)

Tire pressure warning system (

P. 392) l

Intuitive parking assist (

P. 136)

5

489

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

CAUTION n

Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flammable gas that may be emitted from the battery.

l l

Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended terminal.

Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” terminals.

n l

Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the battery.

Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following precautions when handling the battery: l

When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

l

Do not lean over the battery.

l

In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

l

Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.

l

Do not allow children near the battery.

490

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE n

To prevent damaging the vehicle

Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle, because the three-way catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard.

n

When handling jumper cables

Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

5

491

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats

If your engine overheats:

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the automatic air conditioning system.

Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.

If you see steam:

Stop the engine and carefully lift the hood.

If you do not see steam:

Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.

Remove the engine compartment cover. (

→P. 377)

Check to see if the cooling fan is operating.

If the fan is operating:

Wait until the engine coolant temperature gauge begins to fall and then stop the engine.

If the fan is not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and call your local Lexus dealer.

After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, check the coolant level and inspect the radiator core (radiator) for any leaks.

492

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

STEP 6

Add coolant if required.

Water can be used in an emergency measure if coolant is unavailable. (

→P. 502)

Have the vehicle checked at your nearest Lexus dealer as soon as possible.

n

Overheating l

In the following situations, your vehicle may be overheating.

The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of power is experienced.

l

Steam is coming from under the hood.

CAUTION n

To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle l

Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and engine drive belt while the engine is running.

l

Do not loosen the radiator cap while the engine and radiator are hot.

Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.

5

493

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE n

When adding engine coolant

Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.

When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.

494

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever in “P”.

Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.

Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide traction under the tires.

Restart the engine.

Shift the shift lever to the “D” or “R” position and carefully apply the accelerator to free the vehicle.

Turn off TRAC/VSC if these functions are hampering your attempts to free the vehicle. (

→ P. 161)

CAUTION n

When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the surrounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

n

When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

5

NOTICE n

To avoid damaging the transmission and other components l

Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.

l

If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

495

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

496

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

Dimensions and weight

Overall length

Overall width

189.9 in. (4825 mm)

71.6 in. (1820 mm)

2WD models 56.1 in. (1425 mm)

Overall height

*

4WD models 56.4 in. (1435 mm)

112.2 in. (2850 mm) Wheelbase

Front

Tread

Rear

Vehicle capacity weight

(Occupants + luggage)

*

:Unladen vehicle

60.4 in. (1535 mm)

60.6 in. (1540 mm)

815 lb. (370 kg)

498

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle identification

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the top left of the instrument panel and in the engine compartment.

This number is also on the Certification Label.

GS430 GS350

6

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

499

6-1. Specifications

Engine

Model

Type

Bore and stroke

Displacement

Drive belt tension

Fuel

Fuel type

Octane Rating

Fuel tank capacity

3UZ-FE

GS430 GS350

2GR-FSE

8-cylinder V type, 4cycle, gasoline

3.58

(91.0

× 3.25 in.

× 82.5 mm)

6-cylinder V type, 4cycle, gasoline

3.70

× 3.27 in.

(94.0

× 83.0 mm)

262.0 cu.in. (4293 cm

3

) 210.9 cu.in. (3456 cm

3

)

Automatic adjustment

Premium unleaded gasoline only

91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher

18.7 gal. (71 L, 15.6 lmp.gal)

500

6-1. Specifications

Lubrication system

GS430 GS350 (2WD) GS350 (4 WD)

Oil capacity

(drain and refill) with filter without filter

Oil grade

5.4 qt. (5.1 L, 4.5 lmp.qt.)

4.8 qt. (4.5 L,

4.0 lmp.qt.)

6.6 qt. (6.3 L, 5.5 lmp.qt.)

6.2 qt. (5.9 L, 5.2 lmp.qt.)

6.7 qt. (6.4 L, 5.6 lmp.qt.)

6.3 qt. (6.0 L,

5.3 lmp.qt.)

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy the above grade and viscosity.

Recommended oil viscosity

Outside temperature

*

:5W-30 is an oil that provides optimal levels of fuel efficiency.

Oil viscosity: l

The 5W portion of the oil viscosity rating indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

l

The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the oil viscosity when the oil is as its operating temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load condition.

6

501

6-1. Specifications

Cooling system

Capacity

Coolant type

10.7 qt.

GS430

(10.1 L, 8.9 lmp.qt.)

GS350

9.6 qt.

(9.1 L, 8.0 lmp.qt.)

Use either of the following:

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

Ignition system

Spark plug

Make DENSO

NGK

Gap

SK20R11

IFR6A11

GS430

0.043 in. (1.1 mm)

GS350

FK20HBR11

ILFR6D11T

NOTICE n

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.

502

6-1. Specifications

Electrical system

Battery

Open voltage at

68

°F (20°C):

Charging rates

Differential

12.6

⎯ 12.8V Fully charged

12.2

⎯ 12.4V Half charged

11.8

⎯ 12.0V Discharged

(Voltage is checked 20 minutes after the engine and all lights are turned off.)

5A max.

Oil capacity

Oil type and viscosity

GS430

1.42 qt.

(1.35 L, 1.19 lmp.qt.)

GS350 (2WD)

1.42 qt.

(1.35 L, 1.19 lmp.qt.)

GS350 (4 WD)

Front: 0.73 qt.

(0.70 L, 0.61 lmp.qt.)

Rear: 1.42 qt.

(1.35 L, 1.19 lmp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL-5

SAE 75W-90, Toyota Genuine Differential gear oil LT API

GL-5 SAE 75E-85 or its equivalent

Hypoid gear oil API GL-5

Above 0°F (-18°C): SAE 90

Below 0°F (-18°C): SAE 80W or SAE

80W-90

6

503

6-1. Specifications

Transmission

Fluid capacity

Drain and refill

Fluid type

GS430

1.8 qt.

(1.7 L, 1.5 lmp.qt.)

GS350 (2WD) GS350 (4 WD)

1.9 qt. 2.9 qt.

(1.8 L, 1.5 lmp.qt.) (2.8 L, 2.4 lmp.qt.)

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

NOTICE n

Transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

Brakes

Pedal clearance

GS430

GS350

*

*

1

2

Pedal free play

2.9 in. (74 mm) Min.

2.6 in. (65 mm) Min.

Less than 0.04 0.04 ⎯ 0.08 in. (1.0 ⎯ 2.0 mm)

Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Parking brake pedal travel

* 3

5 ⎯ 7 clicks

Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3

*

1

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 200 N (20.4 kgf, 45 lbf) while the engine is running.

* 2

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 490 N (50.0 kgf,

110 lbf) while the engine is running.

*

3

: Parking brake pedal travel when depressed with a force of 300 N (30.6 kgf,

67.4 lbf).

504

6-1. Specifications

Steering

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Tires and wheels

Type A

Tire size

Front and rear tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Spare tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

245/40R18 93Y, P245/40R18 93V, T155/

70D17 110M (spare)

Driving under normal conditions

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

2

or bar)

Driving at high speeds above 100 mph

(160km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 9 psi (60 kPa, 0.6 kgf/cm

2

or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

2

or bar)

18

× 8 JJ, 17 × 4T (spare)

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

6

505

6-1. Specifications

Type B

Tire size

Front and rear tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

225/50R17 94W, P225/50R17 93V, T155/

70D17 110M (spare)

Driving under normal conditions

33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm

2

or bar)

Driving at high speeds above 100 mph

(160km/h) (in countries where such speeds are permitted by law)

Add 7 psi (50 kPa, 0.5 kgf/cm

2

or bar) to the front tires and rear tires. Never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure indicated on the tire sidewall.

Spare tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Wheel size

Wheel nut torque

60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm

2

or bar,)

17

× 7 1/2 JJ, 17 × 4T (spare)

76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)

506

6-1. Specifications

Light bulbs

Exterior

Light Bulbs

Headlights (low beam)

Headlights (high beam)

Front turn signal lights

Parking lights

Fog lights

Front side marker light

Rear turn signal lights

Back-up lights

Trunk light

Vanity lights Interior

A: D4S high-intensity discharge bulbs

B: HB3 halogen bulbs

C: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

D: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

E: HB4 halogen bulbs

F: Double end bulbs

Bulb No.

D4S

HB3

HB4

194

921

5

51

5

21

W

35

60

21

16

5

8

D

C

D

E

Type

A

B

C

D

F

D

6

507

6-1. Specifications

Fuel information

Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.

Premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating 91 (Research Octane

Number 96) or higher required for optimum engine performance.

At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications of

ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.

n

Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline n

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Lexus has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

If premium gasoline is not available

If 91 Octane cannot be obtained, you may use unleaded gasoline with an Octane

Rating as low as 87 (Research Octane Number 91).

However, use of unleaded fuel with an Octane Rating lower than 91 may result in engine knocking (GS350 only: or drastically reduce output to protect itself while driving with heavy load). Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage and should be corrected by refueling with higher octane unleaded gasoline.

n l l

If your engine knocks

Consult your Lexus dealer.

You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

n

Gasoline quality

In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gasoline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Lexus dealer.

508

6-1. Specifications n

Gasoline quality standards l l

Automotive manufacturers in the US, Europe and Japan have developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide.

The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emission levels. In the US, category 3 or 4 has been adopted.

n l

The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction through better performance.

Lexus recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives l l

Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits.

All gasoline sold in the US contains detergent additives to clean and/or keep clean intake systems.

n

Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in many areas.

n

Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

Lexus does not recommend blended gasoline l l

Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15% MTBE.

If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 87.

l

Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

n

Lexus does not recommend gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Lexus DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.

The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Lexus dealer for service.

6

509

510

6-1. Specifications

NOTICE n

Notice on gasoline quality l

Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

l l

Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.

Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that stated here will cause persistent heavy knocking.

At worst, this will lead to engine damage.

n

Fuel-related poor driveability

If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

n

When refueling with gasohole

Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle’s paint.

6-1. Specifications

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

Tire size

DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Location of treadwear indicators

Run-flat tire (RFT) or standard tire

(

→P. 513)

(

→P. 512)

(

→P. 390)

(

→P. 472)

This vehicle can be equipped with either run-flat tires (RFT) or standard tires. A “RFT” or “DSST” mark is molded on the sidewall of the run-flat tire.

Tire ply composition and materials

Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

511

6

6-1. Specifications

512

Radial tires or bias-ply tires

A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a bias-ply tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE

A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube maintains the air pressure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure

Maximum cold tire inflation pressure

(

→P. 516)

(

→P. 516)

This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Uniform tire quality grading

For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.

Summer tire or all season tire (

→P. 395)

An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked “M+S” is a summer tire.

“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” (

→P. 474)

A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary emergency use only.

Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)

DOT symbol

*

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

Tire manufacturer’s identification mark

Tire size code

Manufacturer’s optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters)

Manufacturing week

Manufacturing year

*

: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards.

6-1. Specifications

Tire size n

Typical tire size information n

Tire dimensions

The illustration indicates typical tire size.

Tire use

(P = Passenger car,

T = Temporary use)

Section width (millimeters)

Aspect ratio

(tire height to section width)

Tire construction code

(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)

Wheel diameter (inches)

Load index (2 or 3 digits)

Speed symbol

(alphabet with one letter)

Section width

Tire height

Wheel diameter

6

513

514

6-1. Specifications

Tire section names

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Bead

Sidewall

Shoulder

Tread

Belt

Inner liner

Reinforcing rubber

Carcass

Rim lines

Bead wires

Chafer

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.

Department of Transportation.

It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

n

DOT quality grades

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

6-1. Specifications n

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

n

Traction AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turning) traction.

n

Temperature A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

6

515

6-1. Specifications

516

Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term

Cold tire inflation pressure

Maximum inflation pressure

Recommended inflation pressure

Accessory weight

Curb weight

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

Normal occupant weight

Meaning

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

The sum of:

(a) Curb weight

(b) Accessory weight

(c) Vehicle capacity weight

(d) Production options weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1

*

that follows

6-1. Specifications

Production options weight

Rim

Tire related term

Occupant distribution

Meaning

Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1

*

below

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter

(Wheel diameter)

Rim size designation

Rim type designation

Rim width

Vehicle capacity weight

(Total load capacity)

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Vehicle normal load on the tire

Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim diameter and width

The industry manufacturer's designation for a rim by style or code

Nominal distance between rim flanges

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating capacity

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1

*

below), and dividing it by two

6

517

6-1. Specifications

518

Tire related term

Weather side

Bead

Bead separation

Bias ply tire

Carcass

Chunking

Cord

Cord separation

Cracking

CT

Extra load tire

Groove

Meaning

The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

The strands forming the plies in the tire

The parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord material

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The space between two adjacent tread ribs

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Innerliner

Innerliner separation

Intended outboard sidewall

Light truck (LT) tire

Load rating

Maximum load rating

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

Measuring rim

Open splice

Outer diameter

Overall width

Meaning

The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(b) The outward facing sidewall of asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

6

519

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Passenger car tire

Ply

Ply separation

Pneumatic tire

Radial ply tire

Reinforced tire

Section width

Sidewall

Sidewall separation

Meaning

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

A parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corresponding standard tire

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

520

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term

Snow tire

Test rim

Tread

Tread rib

Tread separation

Treadwear indicators

(TWI)

Wheel-holding fixture

Meaning

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E-1136 Standard

Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test

Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a

Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( on at least one sidewall

)

The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road tire

A tread section running circumferentially around a

Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

6

521

6-1. Specifications

*

:Table 1

⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity, Number of occupants

2 through 4

5 through 10

11 through 15

16 through 20

Vehicle normal load,

Number of occupants

3

7

2

5

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded vehicle

2 in front

2 in front, 1 in second seat

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1 in fourth seat

522

6-2. Customization

Customizable features

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be personalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by an authorized Lexus dealership.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Lexus dealer for further details.

Customized

Item Function Default setting setting

Smart access system with push-button start

( → P. 4)

Smart access system with push-button start

Operation signal

(Emergency flashers)

Operation signal

(Buzzer)

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

Wireless remote control

( → P. 14)

Unlocking operation

Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked

Driver’s door unlocked in 1step, all doors unlocked in 2-step

60 seconds

All doors unlocked in 1-step

OFF

30 seconds

120 seconds

6

523

6-2. Customization

Item

Wireless remote control

( → P. 14)

Door lock

(

P. 17)

Function Default setting

Operation indicator

(Emergency flashers)

Operation indicator

(Buzzer)

Trunk unlocking function

ON

ON

ON

Trunk unlocking operation Push and hold

Panic function

Buzzer sounds when pushing with any door not closed

ON

ON

Unlocking using a key

Driver’s door unlocked in 1step, all doors unlocked in 2-step

Speed-detecting automatic door lock function

Opening driver’s door unlocks all doors

Shift the shift lever to “P” unlocks all doors

Shift the shift lever to position other than “P” locks all doors

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

Customized setting

OFF

OFF

OFF

Push twice

One short push

OFF

OFF

All doors unlocked in 1-step

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

524

6-2. Customization

Item Function Default setting

Power windows

( → P. 43)

Moon roof

( → P. 46)

Automatic light control system

(

P. 116)

Linked door lock operation

Linked door key operation

Wireless remote control linked operation

Linked door lock operation

Linked door key operation

Linked operation of components when door key is used

Wireless remote control linked operation

Linked operation of components when wireless remote control used

Light sensor sensitivity

Time elapsed before headlights automatically turn off after doors are closed

Daytime running light

ON

Open and close

ON

ON

Open and close

Slide only

ON

Slide only

Level 3

60 seconds

ON

*: Vehicles sold outside Canada

Customized setting

OFF

Open only

Close only

OFF

OFF

Open only

Close only

Tilt only

OFF

Tilt only

Levels 1 to 5

0 seconds

30 seconds

90 seconds

OFF*

6

525

6-2. Customization

Item Function Default setting

Windshield wipers and washer

( → P. 120)

Illumination

( → P. 306)

Switching operation when the vehicle is stationary

Drip prevention function

Time elapsed before the drip prevention function operates

ON

ON

Variable depending on the vehicle speed

Time elapsed before lights turn off

15 seconds

Operation when the doors are unlocked

Operation after the engine switch turned OFF

ON

ON

Front/rear personal lights turned on when a door is opened

Corresponding light only

Foot lights

Shift lever light

Outer foot light

ON

ON

ON

Rear sunshade

(

P. 328)

Time elapsed before the reverse operation feature activates

0.7 seconds

Customized setting

OFF

OFF

3 seconds

7.5 seconds

30 seconds

OFF

OFF

All lights

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

0 seconds

0.9 seconds

1.2 seconds

526

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize

After reconnecting or performing maintenance on the battery, the following items must be initialized for normal system operation.

When to initialize Item Reference

P. 44 Power window

Variable gear ratio steering

Intuitive parking assist

Engine oil maintenance data

• After reconnecting or changing the battery

• After changing a fuse

• After changing engine oil

P. 148

P. 148

P. 381

Tire pressure warning system

• When rotating the tires on vehicles differing with front and rear tire inflation pressures.

• When changing the tire inflation pressure by changing traveling speed or load weight, etc.

• When changing the tire size.

P. 392

6

527

6-3. Initialization

528

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Tollfree: 1-800-25-LEXUS).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or the Lexus Division of Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline tollfree at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http:// www.safercar.gov

; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov

.

530

Alphabetical index

Alphabetical index

A

A/C (Air conditioning system)........190

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)........159

Active stabilizer suspension system......................................................159

Air conditioning system (A/C)

Air conditioning filter .......................406

Automatic air conditioning system................................................... 190

Airbags

Airbag operating conditions........... 62

Airbag precautions for your child..........................................................65

Airbag warning light ........................450

Curtain shield airbag precautions ..........................................68

Front passenger occupant classification system......................... 70

General airbag precautions ...........65

Locations of airbags............................59

Modification and disposal of airbags....................................................69

Side airbag precautions....................65

Side and curtain shield airbags operating conditions ....................... 62

SRS airbags .............................................59

Alarm ............................................................54

Antenna ................................................... 208

Armrest.....................................................327

Ashtrays....................................................320

Audio system

Antenna..................................................208

Cassette player.......................................211

CD player/changer ...........................215

DVD information.................................251

DVD player/changer........................231

DVD video/audio............................. 234

MP3/WMA disc............................... 223

532

Optimal use ......................................... 255

Radio ....................................................... 202

Steering switches .............................. 259

Video CD..............................................247

Automatic headlight leveling system .......................................................118

Automatic light control system.......... 116

AVS (Adaptive Variable

Suspension System).......................... 158

B

BA (Brake Assist).................................. 159

Back-up lights

Wattage................................................. 507

Battery

Checking...............................................386

If the vehicle battery is discharged ........................................488

Preparing and checking before winter.......................................172

Bluetooth

®

..............................................265

Brake

Fluid..........................................................385

Parking brake........................................105

C

Care

Exterior...................................................358

Interior.....................................................360

Seat belts .................................................361

Cargo capacity....................................... 168

Cargo hooks ............................................331

CD player/changer...............................231

Chains .........................................................174

Child-protectors........................................18

Child restraint system (CRS)

Definition ...................................................76

Installation .................................................79

Alphabetical index

Installing CRS with lower anchorages.......................................... 83

Installing CRS with seatbelts ..........80

Installing CRS with top straps........ 84

Child safety

Airbag precautions ............................. 65

Child restraint system .........................76

Child-protectors.....................................18

How your child should wear the seatbelt............................................................ 36

Installing child restraints.....................79

Moon roof................................................ 48

Power window lock switch ..............43

Power window precautions............ 45

Removed electronic key battery precautions .........................................410

Seat belt comfort guide......................34

Seat belt precautions...........................37

Seat heater precautions..... 323, 325

Trunk............................................................24

Cigarette lighter.....................................321

Cleaning

Exterior...................................................358

Interior.....................................................360

Seat belts .................................................361

Clock...........................................................318

Coin holder ..............................................313

Compass ................................................. 339

Condenser.............................................. 384

Console box.............................................. 311

Cooling system

Engine overheating.......................... 492

Cruise control

Cruise control........................................124

Dynamic radar cruise control........127

Cup holders ............................................. 314

Curtain shield airbags............................59

Customizable features.......................523

D

Daytime running light system .............117

Defogger

Rear window .........................................198

Side mirror..............................................198

Dimension................................................498

Dinghy towing......................................... 178

Display

Multi-information display.................. 113

Touch screen ........................................180

Trip information ..................................... 114

Warning message............................ 455

Do-it-yourself maintenance .............369

Door courtesy lights............................307

Door pocket............................................. 315

Doors

Door lock....................................................17

Rear door child protector ................. 18

Driver's seat belt reminder light .....452

Driving

Correct posture.....................................57

Procedures ..............................................90

DVD player/changer........................... 231

E

Electronic key

Replacing battery.............................. 409

If the electronic key does not operate properly ........................... 486

533

Alphabetical index

534

Emergency, in case of

If a warning light turns on ..............449

If a warning message is displayed ............................................455

If the engine will not start ...............483

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P...................................484

If the battery is discharged .......... 488

If you have a flat tire ..............472, 473

If you lose your keys.........................485

If you think something is wrong...................................................445

If your vehicle becomes stuck.....495

If your vehicle needs to be towed ...................................................438

If your vehicle overheats................492

If the electronic key does not operate properly............................486

Engine

Compartment .....................................375

Hood........................................................ 372

How to start the engine..................... 97

If the engine will not start ...............483

Overheating.........................................492

Power switch .......................................... 97

Engine compartment cover ............. 377

Engine coolant temperature gauge.......................................................106

Engine/inverter coolant

Capacity.................................................502

Checking...............................................383

Preparing and checking before winter...................................... 172

Engine immobilizer system..................52

Engine oil

Capacity.................................................. 501

Checking...............................................378

Preparing and checking before winter.......................................172

Engine oil maintenance data ............ 381

EPS (Electric Power Steering) ........ 159

Event data recorder............................ 447

F

First-aid kit storage belt .......................331

Floor mats................................................330

Fluid

Brake.......................................................385

Washer...................................................389

Fog lights

Switch..........................................................119

Wattage................................................. 507

Foot light ..................................................307

Front passenger occupant classification system............................ 70

Front passenger's seat belt reminder light ..................................... 452

Front seats

Adjustment ...............................................25

Driving position memory .................. 27

Front turn signal lights

Wattage................................................. 507

Fuel

Capacity ................................................500

Fuel gauge..............................................106

Fuel pump shut off system............ 446

Gas station information ................. 542

Information ...........................................508

Refueling....................................................49

Fuel filler door........................................... 49

Fuel pump shut off system................. 446

Fuses............................................................. 411

Alphabetical index

I

H

G

Garage door opener.......................... 334

Gas station information......................542

Gauges.......................................................106

Glove box .................................................. 311

Hands-free system ...............................262

Head restraints......................................... 30

Headlight aim .........................................429

Headlight cleaner ..................................123

Headlights

AFS (Adaptive Front lighting

System) ...................................................117

Discharge headlights precautions ....................................... 436

Replacing light bulbs .........................431

Switch..........................................................116

Wattage .................................................507

Heaters

Seat heaters.............................. 323, 325

Side mirror..............................................198

Hill-start assist control .........................159

Hood ..........................................................372

Hooks

Cargo........................................................331

Shopping bag........................................331

Illuminated entry system ................... 306

I/M test..................................................... 368

Indicator lights.......................................... 110

Initialization

Items to initialize..................................527

Inside rear view mirror.......................... 40

Instrument panel light control...........107

Interior lights

Interior lights ........................................308

Wattage .................................................507

J

K

Keys

If you lose your keys........................ 485

Key number plate .....................................2

Keys .................................................................2

Power switch...........................................97

Mechanical key..........................................2

If the electronic key does not operate properly ........................... 486

Wireless remote control.....................14

L

Intuitive parking assist.......................... 136

Jack

Positioning the jack...........................373

Replacing the wheel.........................473

Jack handle..............................................473

Lexus link system ..................................343

Light bulbs

Replacing ................................................ 431

Wattage................................................. 507

Light sensitive optitron meter...........108

Lights

Fog light switch ......................................119

Headlights switch..................................116

Interior lights list................................. 306

Replacing light bulbs......................... 431

Turn signal lever ..................................104

Vanity lights ............................................317

Wattage................................................. 507

M

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance......... 369

General maintenance .................... 365

Maintenance data............................. 498

Maintenance requirements ..........363

535

Alphabetical index

Meter

Instrument panel light control .......107

Meters ...................................................... 106

Micro dust and pollen removal mode........................................................ 193

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror.......................40

Side mirror heater.............................. 198

Side mirrors...............................................41

Vanity mirrors........................................317

Moon roof...................................................46

MP3 disc ...................................................... 223

Multi-information display ........................113

O

Odometer.................................................106

Oil

Engine oil ...............................................378

Opener

Fuel filler door......................................... 49

Hood........................................................ 372

Trunk............................................................. 21

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjusting and folding ...........................41

Driving position memory...................27

Outside temperature display............ 319

Overhead console ................................ 312

Overheating, Engine...........................492

P

Parking brake..........................................105

Parking lights

Replacing light bulbs..........................431

Switch ......................................................... 116

Wattage..................................................507

PCS (Pre-Collision System) .............160

Personal lights....................................... 308

Power meter............................................106

536

Power outlet ........................................... 322

Power windows........................................ 43

R

Radar cruise control..............................127

Radiator....................................................384

Radio..........................................................202

RDS (Radio Data System) ................204

Rear sunshade .......................................328

Rear turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs......................... 431

Wattage................................................. 507

Rear view monitor system ................. 155

Rear window defogger ....................... 198

Replacing

Electronic key battery.....................409

Fuses............................................................411

Light bulbs .............................................. 431

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners..........................................530

S

Seat belts

Adjusting the seat belt ........................34

Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR).......................................................35

Child restraint system installation..............................................79

Cleaning and maintaining the seat belts ......................................361

Emergency Locking Retractor

(ELR)........................................................35

How to wear your seat belt .............33

How your child should wear the seat belt...........................................36

Pre-collision seat belts........................35

Pregnant women, proper seat belt use .........................35

Alphabetical index

Reminder light..................................... 452

Seat belt extenders.............................. 36

Seat belt pretensioners.......................34

Seat heaters.................................323, 325

Seat ventilators...................................... 325

Seating capacity .......................................171

Seats

Child seats/child restraint system installation..............................79

Cleaning ................................................360

Driving position memory ..................27

Head restraint ........................................ 30

Properly sitting in the seat.................57

Seat adjustment......................................25

Seat adjustment precautions...........25

Seat heaters.............................. 323, 325

Ventilated seats.................................. 325

Service reminder indicators ................111

Shift lever

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P...................................484

Transmission......................................... 100

Shift lock system ................................... 484

Shopping bag hooks.............................331

Side airbags............................................... 59

Side marker lights

Switch..........................................................116

Side mirror

Adjusting and folding........................... 41

Driving position memory ..................27

Smart access system with push-button start

Antenna location ......................................6

Entry function .............................................4

Starting the hybrid system ................97

Spare tire

Inflation pressure ...............................505

Spare tire................................................474

Spark plug................................................502

Specifications .........................................498

Speedometer ..........................................106

Steering wheel

Adjustment...............................................39

Audio switches....................................259

Driving position memory.................. 27

Storage compartment ......................... 313

Storage feature.......................................310

Stuck

If your vehicle becomes stuck.... 495

Sun visors .................................................. 316

Switch

Fog light switch ......................................119

Lexus link system switches............343

Light switches .........................................116

Mode select switch..............................101

Power door lock switch ......................17

Power switch...........................................97

Power window switch ........................43

Window lock switch............................43

Wipers and washer switch ............ 120

T

Tail lights

Switch..........................................................116

Theft deterrent system

Alarm...........................................................54

Engine immobilizer system..............52

Theft prevention labels..........................56

Tire inflation pressure ........................ 505

Tire information

Glossary..................................................516

Size............................................................. 513

Tire identification number............... 512

Uniform tire quality grading .......... 514

537

Alphabetical index

538

Tires

Chains.......................................................174

Checking...............................................390

Compact spare tire.......................... 474

If you have a flat tire...............472, 473

Inflation pressure............................... 505

Information............................................... 511

Pressure warning system ..............390

Replacing............................................... 473

Rotating tires........................................390

Size .......................................................... 505

Snow tires................................................175

Tools...........................................................473

Total load capacity ..................................171

Touch screen...........................................180

Towing

Dinghy towing.......................................178

Emergency towing ...........................439

Trailer towing......................................... 177

TRAC (Traction control)....................159

Transmission

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P...................................484

Mode select switch.............................. 101

S mode......................................................102

Transmission .........................................100

Trip meter ................................................. 107

Trunk

Extending a space............................. 332

Opener........................................................ 21

Trunk light..................................................23

Wattage..................................................507

Turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs..........................431

Switch ....................................................... 104

Wattage..................................................507

V

W

Vanity lights

Vanity lights............................................ 317

Wattage................................................. 507

Vanity mirrors ............................................. 317

VDIM (Vehicle Dynamics

Integrated Management)............... 160

Vehicle identification number.........499

Vehicle load limits ................................... 171

Ventilators...............................................325

VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio

Steering) ................................................ 159

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) ..... 159

Warning buzzers

Brake system....................................... 449

Downshifting..........................................103

Open door ............................................451

Seat belt reminder ............................ 452

Warning lights

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .....451

Brake system....................................... 449

Charging system...............................450

ECB/VSC (Electronically

Controlled Brake System/

Vehicle Stability Control)............451

Electric power steering warning light.......................................451

Low fuel level.........................................451

Malfunction indicator lamp ..........450

Master warning light........................ 452

Open door.............................................451

Pre-collision system...........................451

Seat belt reminder light.................. 452

SRS airbags..........................................450

Tire pressure warning light .......... 452

Alphabetical index

Warning messages

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..460

Brake Assist (BA) .............................460

Dynamic radar cruise control...................................458

Engine oil level.................................... 463

Engine oil maintenance.................. 464

Engine oil pressure...........................456

Headlight...............................................456

Hill-start assist control.....................460

Hood ....................................................... 462

Intuitive parking assist ............................458, 465, 468

Moon roof............................................. 463

Open door ........................................... 462

Parking brake...................................... 463

Pre-Collision System ......... 458, 465

Rear lights system ............................. 457

Smart access system with push-button start............................469

Steering lock.............................. 457, 471

Tire pressure warning system......................................456, 464

TRAC (Traction control system)................................................460

Trunk........................................................ 463

VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio

Steering)...............................................461

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control system)................................................460

VSC/ECB (Vehicle Stability

Control/Electronically Controlled

Brake system)..................................460

Washer fluid......................................... 463

Washer

Checking .............................................. 389

Preparing and checking before winter ......................................172

Switch........................................................ 120

Washing and waxing.......................... 358

Weight

Cargo capacity....................................168

Load limits ................................................ 171

Weight.................................................... 498

Wheels ......................................................404

Window glasses ......................................43

Window lock switch ...............................43

Windows

Power windows.....................................43

Rear window defogger....................198

Washer .................................................... 120

Windshield wipers

Position......................................................174

Windshield wipers ............................. 120

Winter driving tips..................................172

Wireless remote control

Locking/Unlocking ...............................14

Replacing the battery...................... 409

WMA disc ...............................................223

539

What to do if...

What to do if...

A tire punctures

The engine does not start

P. 472/

473

If you have a flat tire

P. 52

P. 483

P. 488

Engine immobilizer system

If the engine will not start

If the battery is discharged

P. 484

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from “P”

The shift lever cannot be moved out

The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone

Steam can be seen coming from under the hood

P. 492

If your vehicle overheats

The key is lost

The battery runs out

The doors cannot be locked

P. 485

If you lose your keys

P. 488

If the battery is discharged

Doors

P. 17

P. 54

Alarm The horn begins to sound

The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand

P. 495

If the vehicle becomes stuck

540

What to do if...

The warning light or indicator light comes on

P. 449

If the warning light turns on n

Warning lights

Brake system warning light or v

ABS warning light

P. 449 or or

P. 451

ECB*/VSC warning light

P. 451

Low fuel level warning light

P. 451

SRS warning light

P. 450

Open door warning light

P. 451

Charging system warning light

P. 450

Malfunction indicator lamp

P. 450

Driver’s seat belt reminder light

P. 452

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light

P. 452

Tire pressure warning light

P. 452

Electric power steering warning light

P. 451

Pre-collision system warning light

P. 451

Master warning light

P. 452

*: Electronically Controlled Brake

System

The warning message is displayed

P. 455

If the warning message is displayed

541

542

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 372

Trunk opener

P. 21

Fuel filler door

P. 49

Hood lock release lever

P. 372

Fuel tank capacity

Fuel type

Cold tire inflation pressure

Engine oil capacity

(Drain and refill)

Engine oil type

Fuel filler door opener

P. 49

Tire inflation pressure

P. 505

18.7 gal. (71 L, 15.6 lmp.gal.)

Premium unleaded gasoline only P. 50, 500

P. 505

GS430 GS350 qt. (L, Imp.qt.)

GS350

(2WD models) (4WD models)

With filter 5.4 (5.1, 4.5) 6.6 (6.3, 5.5) 6.7 (6.4, 5.6)

Without filter 4.8 (4.5, 4.0) 6.2 (5.9, 5.2) 6.3 (6.0, 5.3)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W-30

P. 501

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project